Vauxhall - Zafira - Owners Manual - (2007)

Owner’s Manual ZAFIRA Operation, Safety and Maintenance Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest production information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice. Edition: January 2007. TS 1639-B-07 ZAFIRA ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England. Data specific to your vehicle Please enter your vehicle’s d ata here to keep it ea sily acc essible. This inform ation is available under the section " Technical data" as well as on the identifica tion plate and in the Service Book let. Fuel De signation Engine oil Grade Viscosity Tyre pressure Tyre size with up to 3 pe ople with full load Summer tyres Front Rear Front Rear Winter tyres Front Rear Front Rear Weights Pe rmissible Gross Vehicle Weight – EC ke rbweight = L oading Your Zafira is an intelligent c om bina tion of forwardlooking technology, impressiv e safety , env ironmenta l friendliness a nd economy. It now lies with you to drive your vehicle safely and ensure that it perform s perfectly. This O wner’s Manual provides you with all the necessary information to that end. Make sure y our pa ssengers a re awa re of the p ossible risk of accid ent and injury which may result from im proper use of the vehic le. You m ust alway s comply w ith the sp ecific laws of the c ountry that y ou are travelling through. These laws ma y differ from the inform ation in this Ow ner’s Manual. When this Manual refers to a workshop visit, we recommend your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers provide first-class serv ice at reasona ble prices. You will rec eive quick, reliable and indiv idua l service. Exp erienced mechanics, trained by Vauxhall, work according to specific Vauxhall instructions. The O wner’s Ma nual should alwa ys be kept in the vehic le: R eady to hand in the g lov e compartment. Make use of the Owner’s Manual: z The "In Brief" section will give you an initial overv iew. z The table of c ontents at the beginning of the ow ner’s manual and within the individual chapters will show y ou where every thing is. This symbol signifies: 6 continue reading on next page. 3 The asterisk signifies equipment not fitted to all v ehicles (model variants, engine op tions, models specific to one country, optional equipment, Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Acc essories). 9 Warn ing Text marked 9 Warning provides information on risk of accident or injury. Disregard of the instructions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Inform your passeng ers accordingly. Y ellow arrows in the illustrations serve as points of reference or indicate some action to be performed. Black arrows in the illustrations indicate a reaction or a second action to be performed. z Its index will help you find what you want. Direc tional da ta, e.g. left or right, or front or back, in the descriptions alway s relate to the direction of travel. z It w ill fa miliarize y ou with the sophisticated technology. We wish y ou many hours of p leasurab le driving z It w ill increase y our pleasure in your vehicle. z It w ill help you to handle your vehic le expertly . The O wner’s Manual is designed to be clearly laid-out and easily understood. Your V auxhall Team Contents Commitment to customer satisfaction: Our ai m: to k eep you happy with your vehicle. All Vauxhall Authorised Repairers offer first-class serv ice a t competitiv e prices. Experienced, factory-trained technicians w ork according to factory instructions. Y our Authorised Repa irer can supply you with GEN UINE VAU XHALLAPPRO VED PARTS , which hav e und ergone stringent quality and precision chec ks, and of course useful and a ttrac tiv e VAUXHALL-APPROVED AC CESSO RIES. Our nam e i s your guara ntee! For d eta ils of the Va uxhall Authorised Rep airer Netw ork, please r ing this number; 0845 090 2044 In Brief .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 2 Locks, Doors, Windows .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 30 S eats, Interior ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 49 Instrum ents, Controls ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 82 Lighting ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 105 Infotainment S ystem . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 112 C lim ate C ontrol . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 114 Driving and Operation ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 131 S elf-help, Vehicle C are ... .... ..... .... ..... .... 170 S ervice, Maintenance ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 198 Technical Data .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 210 Index . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 230 2 In Brief In Brief To unlock and open the vehicle: Press button q , pull door handle 6 Door locks – p age 30, Keys – pag e 30, Elec tronic imm obiliser – pa ge 30, Radio frequency rem ote control – page 32, Central lock ing sy stem – p age 37, Anti-theft locking system 3 – page 38, Vauxhall a la rm system 3 – p age 42. Unlock vehicle and open with the Open&Start system 3: Electronic key in vehicle reception range, Pull handle 6 Open&S tart system 3 – pa ge 33. In Brief Unlock luggage compartment and open: Press button q on the remote control, or for the Open&Start system 3 place electronic key in the vehicle reception range, operate button beneath handle 6 Open&S tart sy stem 3 – pag e 33, Radio frequency remote control – pag e 32, Central locking system – page 37, Vauxhall alarm system 3 – page 42. To adjust front seat: Pull handle, slide seat, release handle Adjust front seat backrests: Turn handwheel 6 Seats – pa ge 49, Sea t position – p age 50. Do not lea n on seat when a djusting. 9 Warning Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to perm it safe airba g deploy ment. 3 Move seat bac krest to suit sea ting position. 6 Seats – page 49, S eat position – page 50, Folding down the front passenger’s seat – pag e 57. 4 In Brief Adjusting front seat height 3: Operate levers on outboard side of seats Lever pumping m otion up: Seat higher To adjust front seat inclination 3 : Pull inner lever on front of seat, adjust inclination, release lever, engage seat in position Adjusting height of head restraints of front seat and outboard seats in second row: Press knob to release, adjust height, engage down: Ad just inclination b y shifting body weig ht. 6 Head restraints – page 51, Adjust rear centre head restraint and third seat row head restraints – p age 51, Head restraint position – page 51, Removing the head restraint – page 52. Seat lower 6 Seats – page 49, Seat position – page 50. 6 Seats – pa ge 49, Sea t position – p age 50. In Brief Putting on seat belt: Pull out the seat belt smoothly, pass it over your shoulder and click into the belt buckle Adjusting interior mirror: Swivel mirror housing The seat belt must not be twisted a t any point. The la p belt must lie snugly against the body. The front sea t back rests must not be tilted b ack too far (recom mended max imum tilting angle approx. 25°). 6 Mirrors – page 46, automatically dipping interior mirror – p age 46. To release belt, press red button on belt buckle. 6 Three-point seat belt – page 63, Airbag system – pa ge 69, Seat position – page 50. Swivel lever on underside of mirror housing to reduce dazzle at night. 5 Electrical exterior mirrors 3, adjust: Four-way switch in driver’s door Push right or left mirror switch: four-way switch adjusts relevant m irror. 6 Mirrors – page 45, Aspherical exterior m irror – page 45, Fold ex terior mirror – p age 45, Heated ex terior mirrors – pages13, 116. 6 In Brief In Brief 1 Page Side air v ents ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 115 2 Front pa ssenger’s airbag . .... ..... .... . 69 3 Centre air v ents .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 115 4 Left hea ted sea t 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... ... 116 Tyre deflation monitoring sy stem 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... 154 Tyre pressure monitoring sy stem 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... 155 Parking distance sensors 3 .. ..... ... 152 Haza rd warning lights .. .... .... .... 11 107 Central locking ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 39 SPO RT mode 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 150 Right hea ted sea t 3 . ..... .... .... ..... ... 116 5 6 Central information display for time, date, outside temperature, Infotainm ent system 3, check control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 101 Trip computer 3 ... .... ..... .... .... ..... 93, 98 Electronic Climate Control 3 ..... ... 125 Turn signal, headlight flash, dipped beam, main beam ... ... 10, 105 Door-to-door lighting 3 .... .... ..... .... 108 Parking light .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 109 Cruise control 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 151 7 7 Pa ge Remote control on steering wheel 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 112 Page 14 Accelerator pedal .... .... ..... .... . 141, 143 8 Instruments . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 82 9 Horn ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 11 Driv er’s airbag .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... . 69 16 C lutch pedal 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 141 10 Windscreen wiper, wind screen wash system, headlight wash system 3 and rear window w ash sy stem ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 11, 12, 102 11 Pa rk ing lights, dipped beam ... ..... 105 Instrument illumination ... ..... .... ..... 109 Fog tail lig ht .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107 Front fog lights 3 ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 106 Head lig ht range adjustment 3 .... 107 12 Bonnet release lev er .... .... ..... .... .... 170 13 Starter switch with immobiliser .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 9 and Sensor panel for emerg ency op eration Op en&Start system 3 ... . 17 15 Brake pedal .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 141, 157 17 S teering w heel a djustment . ..... .... .... . 9 18 S ta rt/Stop button 3 .... ..... .... ..... 17, 33 19 Ashtray s 3 .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 79 20 S elec tor lever, manual transmission ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 14 Easy tronic 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 14 Automatic transmission 3 .. ..... 14, 15 21 C limate control . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... 114 22 Infotainment system 3 ..... .... ..... .... 112 23 Glove compartment ... ..... .... ... 80, 117 8 In Brief Control indicators O pen&S tart system 3, 0 IDS+ fault , see pages 35, 83. I R v Eng ine oi l pressure, see page 83. Brak e system , clut ch system 3, see pages 84, 158, 205. Airb ag systems, belt t ensioners, see pages 64, 73, 84. v Elec tronic St abili ty Progra mme (ESP® P lu s) 3, see pages 84, 148. X Seat bel t 3, see pages 63, 84. Q Door open, see page 84. p Alternat or, see page 84. W Coola nt temperat ure, see pages 84, 204. A Eng ine electr oni cs, tra nsm ission electronic s 3, im mobili ser, diesel fuel filter 3, fault , see pages 30, 85, 135, 140, 147. j Easytronic 3, start eng ine, see pages 85, 131. Interacti ve Dynam ic Driv ing System 3 , C ontinuous Dam ping Control (CDC ) 3, SPOR T mode 3, see p ages 85, 150. S Engine oil l ev el 3, see p ages 85, 202. 8 Exterior light s, see p ages 85, 105. r Pa rking distance sensors 3, see p ages 85, 152. O Turn sig nal lig ht s, see p ages 10, 85, 106. Y Fuel level, see p ages 86, 88, 144. > Front fog lights 3 , see p ages 86, 106. C Main beam , see p ages 10, 86, 105. r Fog t ail li ght, see p ages 86, 107. T Wi nt er program me of automa tic tra nsm issi on 3 or Easytronic 3 , see p ages 86, 133, 139. 1 SPORT m ode of automa tic transmission 3 or Easyt ronic 3, see p ages 86, 133, 138. y Seat occupancy recogniti on 3, see pages 74, 86. Z Exhaust emi ssion 3 , see pages 86, 147. u Anti -lock Bra ke Syst em (A BS ), see pages 86, 159. ! Prehea ting system 3, Diesel parti cle filter 3, see page 86. w Deflati on Detecti on System 3, Tyre Pressur e Moni toring System 3, see pages 87, 154, 155. B Ad aptiv e Forwa rd Lighting (AFL) 3, fault , see pages 87, 108. m C ruise cont rol 3, see pages 87, 151. In Brief Steering column lock and ignition: Turn key to position 1. To release lock, rotate steering wheel a little Positions: 0 = Ignition off, 1 = Steering released, ig nition off 2 = Ignition on, Diesel engines: preheating 3 = Starting 6 Start – p age 16, Electronic immobiliser – page 30, Parking the vehicle – pa ge 18. Steering column lock and ignition on vehicles with Open&Start system 3: Ensure electronic key is in the vehicle interior reception area and press the Start/Stop button Release steering column lock by moving steering wheel slightly To start the vehicle, also operate brake or clutch p edal. To lock the steering wheel, switch ignition off by pressing the Start/S top button, open driver’s door and engage steering w heel. Do not a llow vehicle to move whilst doing this. 6 Start – page 17, Elec tronic imm obiliser – pa ge 30, Pa rk ing the vehicle – page 18. 9 Steering wheel adjustment: Swivel lever down, adjust height and distance, swivel lever up, engage Do not a djust steering wheel unless vehicle is sta tionary and steering c olumn lock has been released . 6 Airb ag system – page 69. 10 In Brief Turn light switch: 7 = Off 8 = Parking lights 9 = Dipped beam or main beam AUTO = Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Press button: > = Front fog lights 3 r = Fog tail light 6 Lighting – p age 105, Headlight control indicator – page18. Headlight flash, main beam and dipped beam: Headlight = Pull stalk flash towards steering wheel Main beam = Stalk forwards Dipped beam = Stalk forwards again or to the steering wheel 6 Dipped beam, headlight flash – page 105. Switch on turn signals: To the right = Stalk up To the left = Stalk down 6 Turn signals – pag e 106. In Brief Hazard warning lights: On = Press ¨ Off = Press ¨ again Activate horn: j Press in centre of steering wheel 6 Hazard w arning lights – p age 107. 6 Airbag system – pa ge 69, Remote control on the steering wheel 3 – page 112. Windscreen wiper: Move stalk up gently § = Off $ = timed interval wipe % = Slow & = Fast Press stalk down from position § : S ingle swipe. 6 Windscreen wiper – pag e 102, Adjusta ble wip e interv al 3 – page 103, Further information – pages 197, 206. 11 12 In Brief Automatic wiping with rain sensor 3 : Move stalk up gently $ = Automatic wiping with rain sensor § = Off 6 Windscreen wiper – page 102, Further information – pages 197, 206. Operating windscreen and headlight wash systems 3: Pull stalk towards steering wheel 6 Windscreen wa sh system and headlight wash system – p age103, Further inform ation – pages 197, 207. Activate rear window wiper and wash system: Wiper on = Stalk forwards Wiper off = Stalk forwards again Washing = Push the stalk forwards and then hold 6 Rear window wiper and wash sy stem – pag e 104, Further information– p ages 197, 206. In Brief Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors: On = Press Ü Off = Press Ü again 6 Climate control – page 114, heated rear window – page 116. Clearing fogged or icy windows: Air distribution on l , Rotary knob for temperature and air volume to the right; Air conditioning system 3: Button n must also be pushed; Automatic air conditioning system 3: Press buttons n and V , Move rotary knob for temperature to the right, air quantity to A; Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3: Press button V 6 Electronic Climate C ontrol (EC C) 3 – page 114. 13 Set automatic mode of Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3: Press AUTO button, select temperature with rotary knob, open air vents 6 Electronic C limate Control (ECC ) 3 – see page 125. 14 In Brief Manual transmission: Reverse: with the vehicle stationary, w ait 3 seconds after declutching and then pull up the button on the selector lever a nd enga ge the gea r. If the gear does not engag e, set the lever in neutral, release the clutch pedal and depress again; then repeat gear selection. Easytronic 3: N = Idling o = Driving position + = Higher gear = Lower gear A/M = Switch between Automatic and Manual mode R = Reverse gear (with selector lever lock) Automatic transmission 3: P = Park position R = Reverse gear N = Neutral (idling) D = Automatic gear selection 3 = 1st to 3rd gear 2 = 1st and 2nd gear 1 = 1st gear The selector lever must alway s be mov ed in the appropriate direction as far as it will go. Upon release, it autom atically returns to the centre position. Pay heed to the gear/mode ind icator in the transm ission display . P or N must be engaged when starting. The footb rake must b e depressed when starting. 6 Ea sy tronic 3 – pag e 131. To leav e P or N, switch on ignition, d epress footbrake and press button on selector lever. In Brief 15 Press button on selector lever to eng age P or R. Press button on selector lev er to engage P or R. P P R only when the vehicle is stationary, apply handb ra ke first only when the vehicle is stationary R only when the vehicle is sta tionary, apply hand brake first only when the vehicle is sta tionary 6 Automatic tra nsmission 3 – pag e 136. 6 Automatic transmission 3 – page 136. Automatic transmission with ActiveSelect 3: P = Park position R = Reverse gear N = Neutral (idling) D = Automatic gear selection Selector lever in D to the left: Manual mode + = Higher gear = Lower gear P or N must be engag ed w hen starting. To leave P or N, switch on ignition, depress footbrake and p ress b utton on selector lever. 16 In Brief Before starting-off, check: To switch on the ignition, only turn the key to 2. z Ty re pressure and tyre cond ition – see pa ges 159, 220. 6 Electronic im mobiliser – pa ge 30, Diesel fuel system – page 203. z Engine oil level and fluid levels in engine com partment – see pages 202 to 207. z All windows, mirrors, exterior lighting and num ber p la tes are free from dirt, snow and ice and are operational. z No ob jects are placed in front of the rear wind ow, on the instrument panel or in the area in which the airbag s inflate. z Seats, seat belts and mirrors are correctly ad justed. z Bra ke op eration. Start engine: Operate clutch and brake, automatic transmission 3 to P or N, Easytronic 3: operate brake, do not accelerate, Petrol engine: turn key to 3; Diesel engine: turn key to 2, when control indicator ! goes off1) , turn key to 3; Release key when engine is running Before restarting or switching off the engine, turn key back to 0. 1) Prehea ting system only switches o n at low ou tsid e temp era tures. In Brief 17 To switch on the ignition, d o not p ress the brake or clutc h pedal and only press the button briefly . Do not start unless vehicle is stationary. 6 O pen&Start system 3 – page 33, Elec tronic imm obiliser – pa ge 30, Diesel fuel system – p age 203. Start engine, Open&Start system 3 : Electronic key must be within reception range of the interior, Operate clutch or brake, Automatic transmission 3 in P or N, Easytronic 3: Operate brake, do not accelerate, Petrol engine: Press button; Diesel engine: Briefly press button, when control indicator ! goes off1) , press button again for 1 second; release button when engine is running Press button ag ain to repeat the starting proced ure or switch off the engine. 1) Preh ea ting system on ly sw itch es on a t low outsid e tem peratures. Release handbrake: Raise handle slightly, press release button, lower handle all the way 6 Handbrake – page 158. 18 In Brief Parking the vehicle: apply handbrake firmly, switch ignition off, lock steering wheel, lock vehicle To lock, press button p on the remote control or in the case of the O pen&Start system 3, touch the sensor in one of the front door handles. With Open&S tart sy stem 3 , the d riv er’s door must be opened to lock the steering wheel. To activate the Vauxhall alarm system 3, press button p or with O pen&Start sy stem 3, touch sensor in one of the front door ha ndles. To activate the a nti-theft lock ing sy stem 3 , press button p twice. Advice when parking: 6 For more information – pa ge 30, Open&S tart sy stem – page 33, Radio rem ote control – pag e 32, Central lock ing – page 37, Vauxhall a la rm system 3 – p age 42, Vehicle decommissioning – page 209. z Alw ays apply the handbrake firmly. Apply the hand brake as firm ly as possible on uphill or downhill slop es. To reduce operating forces, depress foot b ra ke at the same time. z Do not park the vehicle on an ea sily ignitab le surfa ce. The high tem perature of the exhaust system could ignite the surface. z Close window. z Before switching off ignition: with manual transmission, engage first or reverse gear; with automatic tra nsmission 3 , selec tor lever in P; with Easytronic 3 engage first or reverse gear (note gear indicator – see pages 131, 136). In Brief 19 z In vehicles with automa tic transmission 3 the key can only be removed with the selector lever in position P. With the O pen&Start system 3 " P" flashes in the transm ission display for severa l seconds if P ha s not been selected or the handbrake has not been applied . That was the most important information in brief for your first drive in your vehicle. z On vehicles with Ea sytronic 3 control indica tor R flashes for a few seconds after the ig nition is switched off if the handb ra ke has not been app lied – see pa ge 84. The other pages of this chapter contain a summary of the noteworthy functions of your vehicle. z With the Open&S tart sy stem 3 the engine ca n only be switched off when the vehic le is sta tionary. z Turn steering wheel until lock is felt to engage (anti-theft protection), removing ignition key beforehand. With O pen&Start system 3 switch off ig nition and open driver’ s door. z The engine cooling fa ns ma y run after the engine has been sw itched off – see pa ge 201. 6 Further inform ation – see pa ges 207, 209. The remaining chapters of the Owner’s Manual contain important information on operation, safety and maintenance as well as a complete index. 20 In Brief Seats in second row 9 Warning When the row of seats or the backrests are being adjusted, keep hands away from the hinge a rea - risk of injury. Moving seats Push release handle on right or left hand side of sea t bench forwards a nd mov e seat row forwards or backw ards. Release handle and allow seat row to loc k into position. Adjust backres ts of outboard s eats Push down release lever on outboard side of backrest, b ackrest angle can be adjusted in two places tow ards the rea r. Release handle and latch back rest into position. The backrest engages in sev eral positions. The seat m ust not be occupied whilst the vehicle is m oving if the seat is in the vertica l position or tilted forwards. The outboard seat b ackrests can be tilted forwards until they are fla t in order to make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle. Push relea se lev er down and tilt backrest forward. To move the back rest upright or chang e the position, push release lever down and adjust ba ckrest. Release ha nd le and engage back rest. Seats in third row 9 Warning When the seats are being moved upright or folded in, keep hands away from hinge area - risk of injury. Move se ats upright out of vehicle floor Remove floor c ov ering 3. Removing luggag e c om partment cover 3 – see page 57. Before moving the seats upright, slide seat bench of second row of seats forwards by pushing forward the lever a t the right or left-hand side of the seat b ench. The tip of the arrow at the seat bench m ust be in front of the square m ark. S lide front seats forwards a little if necessary. In Brief The sea t belts must be routed through the belt holder a s shown in the illustration. The latch plates must be inserted in the holder. 9 Warning In the version with Flex Organizer 3 – see page 60, the belts must be suspended in the right and left seat belt ey es on the floor of the vehicle without twisting – see illustra tion ab ov e a nd page 67, Fig. 17420 T. All com ponents must be removed from the rails 3 in the lugg age compartment. From lug gage compartm ent, use one hand to lift seat by the handle, sw iv el ba ck and move upright until it a ud ib ly engag es. Use other ha nd to support top of backrest, see Fig. 17372 T. 21 Lift up cover in floor between the seats and swivel b elt buckles upwards – see pag e 22, Fig. 17374 T. Remove latch plate and seat b elt from seat belt hold er. 9 Warning The belt must not b e routed through the belt holder when the seat belt is being worn. Move seat bench in sec ond row of seats to required position a nd engage by pushing lever on right or left-hand side of seat bench forwa rd s – see page 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit luggage compartment cover 3 by fitting behind the third row of seats – see page 57. 22 In Brief Fold se ats into floor of vehicle Removing luggage com partment c ov er 3 – see page 57. Before folding in the seat, slide seat bench in second row of seats forwards by pushing forward lever on right or left-hand side of seat b ench – see pa ge 20, Fig. 17369 T. The tip of the arrow on the seat bench m ust be in front of the sq uare mark . Slide front seats forwards a little if necessary. Push down head restraints of seats in third row – releasing spring catches by pressing. Guide seat belts through belt holder as shown in illustration and insert latch p lates into holder. From lugga ge com partment, press button at top of seat backrest and swiv el backrest forward. Raise seat by handle at rear and swiv el bac krest further forwa rd s until seat is lowered into v ehicle floor. Hold seat by handle during the entire swiv elling proced ure. Push b elt buckles into recess in floor a nd close c ov er. Move seat bench in sec ond row of seats to required position a nd engage by pushing lever on right or left-hand side of seat bench forwa rd s – see page 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit luggage compartment cover 3 behind second row of seats – see page 57. Insert floor cover 3. The components of the rails 3 and the Flex Organizer 3 – see page 60, m ust only be used with the seats in the third row of seats folded in and the seat belts unhooked – see page 67, Fig. 17420 T. Attach released belt hooks to magnets of brack et – see page 67, Fig. 17399 T. In Brief Airbag system The airbag sy stem consists of a number of individual systems. Front airbag system The front airbag system is trig gered in the event of a serious a ccident involving a frontal im pact and forms safety c ushions for the driver and front passenger. The forward movem ent of the d riv er and front passenger is check ed a nd the risk of injuries to the upper body a nd head thereby substantially reduced. Side airbag system 3 The sid e airbag is triggered in the event of a side-on c ollision to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passenger in the respective door area. This substantially reduces the risk of injury to the upp er body and pelv is. Curtain airbag sys te m 3 23 The curtain a irba g system triggers in case of a side-on collision and provid es a safety barrier in the hea d area on the respective side of the vehic le. This reduces the risk of injury to the hea d considerab ly in case of a side-on collision. 6 Airb ag system – page 69. 24 In Brief Active head restraints 3 on front seats Operating menus in the information display 3 In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the active head restraints tilt forwards slightly. The head is more effectiv ely supported by the head restraint and the risk of injuries caused by whiplash in the neck area is red uced. Menu options are selected via menus and using the arrow buttons or the multi-function knob of the Infotainment sy stem 3 or the buttons 3 on the steering wheel. The respective menu options are shown on the d isplay . Active head restraints are id entified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleev es. Selection using the arrow buttons 3: Press the arrow buttons to the left or right. 6 Head restra ints – page 51. S elec tion using multi-function knob 3: rotate and press multi-function knob. To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Mai n and select. In Brief Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer 1 257.0 Ø 40 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 Tyres Selection with left adjuster wheel on steering wheel 3: turn adjuster wheel and press. 6 Information display – page 89 19,5° 19:36 All values miles Coolant level mph ch eck gals mpg OK Trip computer 3 Check control 3 The trip computers provide information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically. The check control softwa re monitors Functions: z Range z Instanta neous consum ption z Distanc e z Average speed z Effective consumption z Average consumption z Stop watch z Tyre pressure 3 6 Trip comp uter 3 – pages 93, 98. z Fluid levels z Tyre pressure 3 z Remote control battery z Vauxhall alarm system 3 z Important ex terior lighting , including cables and fuses. 6 Check control 3 – page 101. 25 26 In Brief Remote control on steering wheel 3 The functions of the Infotainm ent system 3 and the information display can be opera ted with the remote control on the steering wheel. Further information is available in the I nfotainment system operating instructions. 6 Remote control on steering wheel 3 – page 112, Infotainm ent system – page 113. Twin Audio 3 Tw in Audio p rov id es rear seat occupants with the opportunity to listen to a different audio source tha n the one selected by the driver on the Infotainment sy stem. Only a n audio source tha t is not currently active on the radio system can be controlled using Twin Audio. Tw o headp hone connections are a vailable, with separate volum e c ontrols. Further inform ation is av ailable in the Infotainment sy stem opera ting instructions. 6 Twin Audio 3 – page 112. Open&Start system with electronic key and radio remote control 3 The Open&S tart sy stem allows the vehicle to be locked and unlocked, including mechanical anti-theft locking system 3 and the Vauxhall a la rm system 3 without a mechanical key and the engine to be started and stopped using a S ta rt/Stop button. All the d riv er has to do is carry the electronic key around with him. 6 Open&S tart system 3 – pa ge 33. In Brief Parking distance sensors 3 Sport mode 3 FlexOrganizer 3 When rev erse gear is selected, the pa rk ing distance sensors switch on automatically. To activate The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be enab led m anually at a speed of less than 15 mph (25 k m/h) using the r button on the instrum ent panel. SPORT mode is used to cha ng e damping 3 , steering 3, throttle application and the shift point for Easytronic 3 and autom atic tra nsmission 3 whilst driving. The side walls contain retaining strips, where va rious components can be attached to divide the lugg age compa rtm ent or fasten loads. If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle at the front or the rear, a series of acoustic signa ls is hea rd in the v ehicle interior. The interv al between the signals becomes shorter as the obstacle becomes closer. The signal is continuous if the distance is less than 30 cm . 6 Park ing distance sensors 3 – page 152. Press S PO RT button. Damping and steering become more direct and provide better contact with the road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to accelerator movements. With Easy tronic 3 and automatic tra nsmission 3, the shift tim es are shortened and shifting tak es place at higher revs (not with cruise control enabled 3). 6 Sp ort m ode 3 – p age 150. The sy stem consists of z adapters z variable partition net z mesh pockets for the sid e wa lls z hooks in the lug gage compartment 6 FlexO rg aniz er 3 – pag e 60. 27 28 In Brief Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres Tyre pressure loss monitoring system (DDS = Deflation Detection System) 3 The Deflation Detection S ystem continuously monitors the speed of all wheels whilst driving. If a ty re loses pressure, it becom es sm aller and therefore rotates m ore quic kly than the other wheels. If the system detects a difference in speed, the c ontrol indicator w illuminates in red. After a tyre pressure correc tion or after a tyre or w heel cha nge, the system m ust be initialised by pressing the DDS button. 6 Tyre p ressure loss monitoring sy stem 3 – page 154. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3 The Ty re Pressure Monitoring System continually checks the pressure and speed of all four wheels whilst driving. A pressure sensor is insta lled in ea ch wheel. The inflation pressures of the individual wheels are tra nsmitted to a controller, where they are compared. The current tyre pressures ca n be displayed on the Gra phic al Inform ation Display or the Colour Inform ation Display 3. Deviating tyre pressures are displayed in the form of messages on the information display whilst driving. 6 Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3 – pag e 155. In Brief 29 Motorway lighting At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead travel, the dipped bea m automatically raises slightly, thereby increa sing hea dlight rang e. Adaptiv e Forward Lighting 3 – page 108. Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 AFL im prov es lighting in curv es (curve lighting ) on vehicles with Bi-Xenon head lig ht system . Curve lighting The Xenon light bea m pivots based on steering wheel position a nd speed (from a pprox. 6 m ph (10 km /h)). 30 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows Locks, Doors, Windows Replacement keys The key number is specified in the vehic le docum ents and in the C ar Pass 3. Key with foldaway key section 3 The key is a c onstituent of the electronic immobiliser. Ordering keys from a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer g uarantees problem free op eration of the electronic immobiliser. Replacem ent keys ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Loc k cylinders . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca r Pass... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Key with foldaw ay key section 3 . ..... . Electronic immobiliser... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Store personal vehicle settings in the vehicle key 3 ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Radio frequency remote control 3 with mec hanical key .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . O pen&Start system 3 ... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Central locking system . .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fault when locking or unlocking... ..... . Lug gage compartment .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vauxhall alarm system 3. ..... .... .... ..... . Child safety locks . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ex terior mirrors..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Interior mirror .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electric windows 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sunblind on panoramic roof 3 . .... ..... . 30 30 30 30 30 31 32 33 37 40 41 42 45 45 46 46 48 When electronic k eys of the Open&S tart sy stem are being replaced , all keys must be ha nded to the dea ler for programming. Keep the sp are k ey in a safe plac e. Locks – see page 197, Open&S tart sy stem, elec tronic keys – see p age 33. Loc k cylinders Designed to free-wheel if they are forcefully rotated without the correct k ey or if the correct key is not fully inserted. To reset, turn cy linder with the c orrect key until its slot is vertica l, remove key and then re-insert it. If the cylinder still free-wheels, turn the key through 180° and rep eat op eration. Car Pass The Ca r Pass contains a ll of the vehicle’s data and should therefore not be k ept in the vehicle. Have your Ca r Pa ss to hand when consulting a Vaux hall Authorised Repairer. Press button to extend. Press button to retrac t and key sec tion engages audibly . Electronic immobiliser Locks, D oors, Windo ws The system check s w hether the vehicle is allowed to be started with the mechanical key or electronic key of the Open&Start system 3 that is being used. If the key is recognised a s "a uthorised" the vehicle can be started. The checking tak es place via a transponder in the k ey. Control indicator for immobiliser A 31 Note The immobiliser does not lock the doors. Therefore, after leaving the v ehicle a lways lock it and switch on the Vaux hall alarm system 3 – see p ages 38, 42. Store personal vehicle settings in the vehicle key 3 The last settings selected z for the Electronic Climate Control (ECC ) 3 z information display 3 z Infotainment sy stem 3 z instrument illumination The electronic imm ob iliser activates itself automatically after the key has been rem ov ed from the ignition or, with the O pen&Start system 3, w hen the engine is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button. The c od e number of the electronic immobiliser is giv en in the C ar Pass. Control indica tor A illuminates briefly when the ig nition is sw itched on. are stored automatically depending on the vehicle k ey used. If the control indicator flashes w hen the ignition is on, there is a fault in the sy stem; the engine cannot be started. S witc h off the ignition and then rep eat the start attempt. Different settings are stored for ea ch vehicle k ey. Use of a vehicle key will activa te the settings associated with it. If the control indicator A continues flashing, attempt to sta rt the engine using the spare key a nd seek the assistanc e of a work shop. If control indicator A illuminates after the engine is started, there is a fault in the engine electronics or transmission electronics 3 (see pages 135, 140, 147) or there is water in the diesel fuel filter 3 – see page 203. Each tim e the vehicle is locked , the settings are saved again. 32 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows Radio frequency remote control 3 with mechanical key Fault If the central locking system cannot be operated w ith the rem ote control, it may be due to the following : z The range of the remote control has been ex ceeded . z Remote control battery voltage is too low . Battery rep la cement – see next page. Dep ending on the equipment level of your vehic le, one of the remote controls shown on this p age will be used . Radio frequency remote control in version with O pen&Start system 3 – see page 34. The rem ote control is integ ra ted in the key . Used to op erate: z Central locking system , z Mechanical anti-theft locking system 3, z Vauxhall ala rm system 3 . The w indows of vehicles with electric windows in all doors 3 can also be opened or closed using the remote c ontrol – see page 46. The remote control has a ra nge of approx. 5 metres. This range can be affected by outside influences. Aim the remote control at the v ehicle to op erate. Handle the rem ote control with care, protect it from m oisture and high temperatures and avoid unnecessary op eration. Function check by illumination of haz ard warning lig hts. Central locking system, mechanical anti-the ft locking system 3 see p age 37. Vauxhall alarm system 3 see p age 42. Electric windows 3 see p age 46. z Frequent, repeated operation of the remote control outside the reception rang e of the vehicle (e. g. too far from vehicle, rem ote control is then no longer recognised). Remote control sy nchronisation – see next pa ge. z Overloading the c entral locking by operating at frequent intervals, the power supply is interrupted for a short time. z Interferenc e from higher-power radio waves from other sources. To rectify the ca use of the fault, we recommend that y ou seek the assistanc e of a work shop. O pen d riv er’s door with key – see page 40. Locks, D oors, Windo ws Remote control battery re placem ent 33 In the event of a malfunction or when the battery has been replaced, synchronis e the rem ote control After rep lacing the battery, unlock the door with the k ey in the lock. The remote control will be sy nchronised when you sw itc h on the ignition. Open&Start system 3 The electronic k ey must b e within the external reception range about 1 metre from the vehicle in order to lock a nd unlock the vehicle. Replace the battery as soon a s the range of the remote control begins to shrink . Key wit h foldawa y k ey sec tion Ex tend k ey – see page 30. Op en remote control. Rep la ce b attery - battery type – see pa ge 223 – noting installation position. Close remote control. Make sure that y ou dispose of old b atteries in accordance with environmenta l protection regulations. Key wit h fixed k ey sec tion Hav e the battery replaced by a workshop. The O pen&Start system allows the vehic le to be lock ed and unlocked, including the mechanical a nti-theft locking system 3 and the Vaux hall alarm system 3 , and the engine to b e started and stop ped without a m echanical key . All the driver has to do is keep the key to hand. The windows of vehicles with electric wind ow s in all doors 3 c an also be opened or closed from outside using the rem ote control of the elec tronic key – see page 40. If the electronic key is recognized as "a uthorised" the vehicle can b e unlocked by pulling a door handle or by operating the button beneath the tailgate handle and the doors and the tailgate can b e opened. 34 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows The engine and the ignition are switc hed off by p ressing the Sta rt/Stop button a gain. The vehic le must be sta tionary. The immobiliser is activated at the sa me tim e. If the ignition has been switched off and the vehicle is stationary , the steering colum n lock activates autom atic ally when the driver’s door is opened or closed. When the S tart/Stop button is pressed, the system re-checks the authorisation. The electronic key has to be recognised in the interior in order to do this. After the key has been authorised the ignition switches on. At the same time, the electronic immobiliser is switched off and the electromechanic al steering column lock is deactivated . Pressing the S tart/S top button again with the brake or clutch ped al depressed or in P or N with automatic transm ission 3 starts the engine. Press button for a t least one second with the vehic le stationa ry or hold down until the engine sta rts. The electronic key must be within the reception range of the interior to turn the ignition on or off. We recommend tha t the driver carries the elec tronic key with him. If the electronic key is not recognised, select another key position. The Op en&Start system 3 does not the lock the vehicle automatically if the electronic key is outside the ex ternal reception range of approx im ately one metre from the vehicle. Radio frequency re mote control Do not p ut the electronic key in the lugg age compartment or in front of the information display. The vehicle can be locked and unlocked by conventional means using the remote control with the buttons on the electronic key. If the brake or clutch peda l is depressed , the engine ca n be started right away with a single press on the Start/Stop button. Releasing the S tart/Stop b utton interrupts the starting proced ure. doors. The electronic key m ust be within the external reception rang e of app rox imately one metre from the vehicle. The vehic le is locked from the outsid e with the doors closed by touching the sensor panel in the door ha ndle of one of the front In ad dition, the mechanical anti-theft locking system and Vauxhall a larm sy stem can b e arm ed a nd disa bled using the remote control. The wind ow s of v ehicles with electric windows in all doors 3 c an also be opened or closed from outside using the rem ote control. Locks, D oors, Windo ws The remote control has a range of approx. 5 metres. This ra nge can b e affected b y outside influences. Aim the rem ote control at the vehicle to opera te. Control indicator for Ope n&Start system 0 Handle the remote control with care, protect it from moisture and high tem peratures and avoid unnecessary opera tion. If this 0 c om es on when the vehicle is in motion, there is a system error. Seek the assistance of a workshop immediately. Central locking system, mechanical anti-the ft locking system 3 Eme rgency operation see page 37. see page 42. Ele ctric windows 3 see page 46. If the control indicator 0 is perma nently on, an error has occ urred in the system . Lock or unlock vehicle using the remote control or the emergency k ey if necessary – see page 37, or try using the spare key . If 0 illumina tes, this can also mean that the steering column lock is still locked: mov e steering w heel to and fro a little and press Sta rt/Stop button again. Function check by illumination of hazard warning lights. Vauxhall alarm s yste m 3 35 If the control indicator flashes 0 with the ignition switched on or with the engine running an opera ting error has occurred, e.g. the electronic key is no longer w ithin the rec eption range of the vehic le interior. During the next starting procedure the engine may not be a ble to be started. Press Start/S top key slightly long er to switch the ignition off. Flashing of the 0 can a lso b e an indication of com plete failure of the electronic key. In this case operation is only possible using the emergency facility – see nex t colum n. InSP3 in the service display or an appropriate m essag e in the information 3 display indicates that the battery of the electronic k ey need s replacing – see page 36. If the Op en&Start system or the electronic key fails (control indica tor 0 flashes or is permanently on) the driver’ s d oor ca n be locked or unloc ked with the emergency key in the electronic k ey: press locking mechanism on underside and remove cap towards the front by applying g entle 36 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows pressure to the cap. Push emergency key towards the outsid e over the detent position and remove. O nly the driv er’s door can be locked and unlock ed using the emergency key . The entire vehicle is unlocked as describ ed on page 41. The Vauxhall alarm sy stem 3 may be triggered when the vehicle is unlocked. Switch ignition on to dea ctivate alarm and release the steering column lock: hold electronic key at m arked position on the steering column p anelling and press the Start/Stop button. Repeat proc edure if necessary. Replacing battery in electronic key Hold electronic key at the marked loc ation to start the engine, depress brake peda l or clutch p edal or in v ehicles with automatic tra nsmission 3 depress brak e pedal a nd select P or N, Then press Start/S top button again. Press S tart/Stop b utton for at least 2 seconds to switch the engine off. Lock all doors ex cep t d riv er’s door as described on page 41. Lock driv er’s door with emergency key . This option is intend ed for emerg encies only. Replace the battery in the electronic key as quickly as p ossible or hav e the sy stem rep aired. Seek the assistance of a workshop. Replace battery immediately if the system is no long er operating properly, or the range of the remote control deteriorates. The need for a battery change is indicated by I nS P3 in the S ervice Display or in vehicles with check control 3 an app ropriate message appears on the display – see page 101. Locks, D oors, Windo ws Fault in Ope n&Start system or remote control If the central lock ing cannot be operated or the engine cannot be started, the cause may be one of the following : 37 Central locking system For doors, boot lid /tailgate and tank flap . To unlock: Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key z Electronic key out of reception range, or out of range of remote control, z Remote c ontrol battery voltage is too low. Battery rep la cement – see page 36, z Frequent, repeated op eration of the rem ote control outside the reception range (e.g. too far from vehic le, remote control is then no longer recognised), To rep la ce the battery , press the lock ing mechanism on the und erside of the electronic key and remove the cover towards the front by applying gentle pressure – see page 35, Fig . 17037 T. Push off cover with emblem on the button side towards the outsid e. z O verloading the central locking by opera ting at frequent interv als, the power supply is interrup ted for a short time, Replace battery, for battery type – see page 223, pay a ttention to installation position. Engage caps. To rectify the cause of the fault, cha nge the position of the electronic key or remote control or rep lace the battery in the remote control. I f the fault persists, seek the assista nce of a w ork shop. Radio fre quency re mote control synchronisation The remote control synchronises itself automatically during every starting proced ure. z Interference from hig her-power rad io wav es from other sources. Emergency operation – see pa ge 35. Press button q on remote control. To open the door, p ull the handle. Open the lugg age compartment by operating the button beneath the tailgate handle. 38 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3 Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key The electronic k ey must b e outsid e of the vehicle. All doors and the luggage compa rtm ent are locked by touching the sensor in the door ha nd le of the driver’s or front passeng er’s door – or – Press button p of the electronic k ey’ s remote control. Mechanical anti-the ft locking sys tem 3 9 Warn ing The electronic key m ust be outside of the vehic le. The vehicle is unlocked b y pulling a door handle or by operating the button beneath the ta ilga te handle. – or – Press button q of the elec tronic key’ s rem ote control. Press button p on remote control. Open&Sta rt system w ith electronic k ey 3 Do not use the sy stem if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot b e unlocked from inside. Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key To lock Close doors, lugga ge com partment and tank flap. All doors must be c losed . At the la test 15 seconds after locking, p ress b utton p of the remote control ag ain. Locks, D oors, Windo ws Loc k buttons on all d oors are positioned suc h that doors cannot be opened. If the ignition was on, the driver’ s door must be opened and closed once so tha t the v ehicle can be secured. Central locking button for locking and unlocking the doors from inside the vehicle 39 Note z If the driv er’s door is not closed properly , the central loc king sy stem will not lock. z To loc k the d oors from within (e.g . to prevent unw anted entry from outside), press central locking switch m in the centre console. O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3 z After unlocking with the key in the lock 3 and opening the driver’ s door, the entire vehicle is unlocked. z If the central lock ing system is loc ked, the doors ca n also be unlocked by p ulling the interior handle. This unlocks the central locking system . Press button m in the centre console: doors are locked or unlocked. All doors must be c losed . The electronic key must be outside of the vehicle. No more than 15 seconds after locking, touch the sensor in the handle of the driver’ s or front passenger’s door ag ain – or – press button p of the electronic key ’s rem ote control again. If the ignition was on, the driver’ s door must be opened and closed once so tha t the v ehicle can be secured. All doors are sec ured aga inst opening. The LED in the central locking b utton m illuminates for around 2 minutes after lock ing with the remote control. If the doors are loc ked from the insid e during driv ing using the central locking button, the LED m illum inates permanently . If the key is in the ignition 3, locking is only possible if all doors a re closed. When the mechanical anti-theft locking sy stem 3 is a ctiv e – see page 38, the doors cannot b e unlocked with this b utton. z Locked doors unlock themselv es autom atically when an accident of a certa in severity occurs (for outside assista nce), and the hazard warning lights come on. In the version with a mec hanical key , the k ey must also be in the ignition. z With the Open&Start system 3 the vehicle cannot be unlocked within 2 second s of locking. Within this tim e a door handle can be pulled or the button beneath the tailgate handle operated to check whether the vehicle is locked . z The O pen&Start system 3 does not lock the v ehicle automatically if the electronic key is outside the recep tion range of the vehicle (more than 1 metre away from the vehicle). 40 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows z A spa re key m ust not be present in the vehicle with the O pen&Start system 3 when the v ehicle is b eing locked. Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key z The locking sensors in the door ha ndles must be kept clean for unrestricted functionality with the O pen&S ta rt system 3. Further information on windows – see page 46. Operating the windows 3 from the outside Fault 9 Warning z Overloading the c entral locking by operating at frequent intervals, the power supply is interrupted for a short time, Ta ke c are when operating the electric wind ows. Risk of injury, particula rly to children. Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly . Keep a close watch on the windows w hen closing them . Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them a s they move. Dep ending on the v ehicle equipment 3, the w indows ca n be opened and closed from the outside in v ehicles with power windows in all doors. Hold down button q of rem ote control to open. To close, hold d own button p or touch sensor in door handle for longer. The electronic key must be recognised within the ex ternal recep tion ra ng e. It is a dvisable for the d riv er to k eep the electronic key to hand. Hold button q or p on the rem ote control depressed until a ll windows hav e opened or completely closed. Open&Sta rt system w ith electronic k ey 3 z Defec tiv e fuse in fusebox – see page 184. To rectify the ca use of the fault, seek the assistance of a workshop. Fault when locking or unlocking Locks, D oors, Windo ws O pen&Start system wi th el ect ronic k ey 3 O perating the button b enea th the tailgate handle unlocks and op ens the luggage compa rtm ent together with the doors if the electronic key is recognized outside of the car, – or – Press button p of the electronic k ey’ s remote control, the luggage compartment will be unlocked together with the doors. Fault in remote control or O pe n&Start system 3 To unlock Turn key or em ergenc y key with O pen&Start system 3 – see page 35, forwards in d riv er’s d oor lock a s far as it will go. Turn key back to a vertic al position and rem ov e. The entire vehicle is unlock ed when the driver’s door is opened. The vehic le is unlock ed (not possible if antitheft locking system 3 enabled beforehand ). To deactivate the anti-theft locking system 3 switch ignition on. Em ergency operation of the Open&Start system 3 – see pa ge 35. To lock O pen front passenger’s door, close d riv er’s door, press centra l locking button m in centre console. Central locking system locks all doors. Close front passenger’ s door. Malfunction in ce ntral locking s yste m To unlock Turn key or em ergenc y key with O pen&Start system 3 – see page 35, forwards in d riv er’s d oor lock a s far as it will go. Turn key back to a vertic al position and rem ov e. The other doors can b e opened b y pulling the handle inside the d oors (not possible if anti-theft locking system 3 enab led b eforehand). The lugg age compartment and fuel filler cap remain locked. To deactivate the anti-theft locking system 3 sw itch ignition on – see page 44. 41 To open To lock With the Open&S tart sy stem 3 – see page 35. To lock passenger’s door, insert key or em ergency key into opening a bove lock on inside of door and opera te lock b y pressing (audible) and close d oor. Procedure m ust be carried out for every door. Driver’s door can be locked from the outside. The unlocked fuel filler ca p and the tailgate cannot be lock ed. Emerge ncy ope ration of Open&Start system 3, see p age 35. Luggage compartment To unlock Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key Press button q on the rem ote control, the lugg age compartment a nd doors a re unlocked. The lugg age compartment is opened b y operating the button beneath the handle. 9 Warn ing Do not drive with the tailgate open or ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky objec ts, since toxic exhaust g as could penetra te the interior. 42 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows Fitting of a ccessories on the tailgate will increase its weight. If it becomes too heavy , the ta ilga te will then not stay open. Rem ote control w ith mechanic al key To activate Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key To close Press button p on remote control. Close lugg age com partment using handle on the inside of the tailgate. Do not operate the button beneath the handle when closing. Otherw ise the luggage compartment will once again be unlock ed. To lock Close doors, lugga ge com partment and tank flap. Open&Sta rt system w ith electronic k ey 3 Press button p of the electronic key remote control or touch sensor in handle of one of the front doors. The electronic key must be recognised in the ex ternal reception area. It is advisable for the driver to keep the electronic k ey to ha nd. Vauxhall alarm system 3 The system m onitors z the doors, luggag e com partment, bonnet, z the passenger compartm ent, z vehicle tilt, e.g. if it is raised, z the ig nition. All doors, windows and the bonnet must b e closed. Press remote control button p to arm the anti-theft alarm sy stem and lock the vehicle. If the ig nition was sw itched on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the anti-theft alarm system can be switched on. Locks, D oors, Windo ws O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3 All d oors, windows and the b onnet must be closed. The electronic key must be outside of the v ehicle. Touch the sensor in the handle of the driver’s or front passenger’ s door – or – Press button p of the elec tronic key’ s rem ote control. If the ignition was switched on, the driver’s door must be opened and closed once so that the a nti-theft ala rm system ca n be switched on. Activation without monitoring of passenge r compartment and vehicle tilt 43 Light emitting diode (L ED) During the first 10 sec onds of anti-theft alarm sy stem activa tion: Switch on when, for exam ple, anim als are to be left in the v ehicle. 1. C lose tailgate a nd bonnet. 2. Press button b in the roof console. The LED in button m flashes (m ax. 10 second s) – see next c olumn 3. C lose doors. 4. Sw itch on a nti-theft ala rm system. LED illuminates. After app rox . 10 seconds the system is ac tiv ated, without m onitoring of the passenger com partment or vehicle tilt. LED flashes until sy stem is switched off. z LED illuminates. z LED flashes quickly = Test, ignition dela y, = Door, luggage compartment, bonnet open or system fault. After the first 10 seconds of anti-theft alarm sy stem activa tion: z LED flashes = slowly z LED comes on = for approx. 1 second Sy stem switched on, Switch off function. If a system fault occ urs, seek the assistance of a w ork shop. 44 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows To deactivate Remote contr ol with m ec hanical k ey Press button q on rem ote control – or – Switch on ignition. O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3 The vehic le is unlock ed by pulling a door ha ndle or by opera ting the button beneath the tailgate handle a nd the anti-theft alarm system is d eactivated when the electronic k ey is recognized as being outside of the vehic le. – or – Press button q of the electronic key’s remote control. Ala rm siren w ith integrat ed batt ery 3 The alarm siren monitors the on-board voltage network and triggers an ala rm if this network is manipulated (e.g . if the vehicle’s ba ttery is disconnected by unauthorised persons). The alarm siren ha s its own power supply and is therefore not dependent on the vehicle’s battery. In the event of a fault in the remote control or the Op en&Start sy stem, open the vehicle as described on page 40. If the alarm is trigg ered when the driver’ s door is opened, dea ctiv ate the anti-theft alarm system by switching on the ignition. If the vehicle’s battery is to be disconnected (e.g. for maintenance w ork ), the alarm siren must be dea ctivated as follows: sw itch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s battery within 15 seconds. Note To swit ch off alarm siren: S witc h ignition on then off. Changes to the vehicle interior, such a s the use of seat covers, could impair the function of passenger comp artment monitoring. Alarm While the anti-theft alarm sy stem is switched on the alarm can be triggered, indica ted b y: z an acoustic sig nal (horn) and z a v isual signal (hazard w arning lights). The number and duration of the alarms are legally established. The alarm can be silenc ed b y pressing a button on the remote control or by switching on the ig nition. The anti-theft alarm system is d eactivated at the same tim e. Locks, D oors, Windo ws Child safety locks 45 Exterior mirrors Swing in e xterior mirror Ad just using the four-wa y switch in the driver’s door. Press mirror switch to the rig ht or left. The four-way switch w ork s on the corresponding mirror. Manually: the exterior m irrors can be folded in by pressing gently on the outer edge of the housing. 9 Warning Use the child safety lock w henever children are oc cup ying the rear seats. Disreg ard may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle pa ssengers must be informed accordingly. The mirror glass is m ov ed in the direc tion whic h corresp onds to the pressing of the four-way switch. Using key or screwdriver, turn rotary knob at rear door lock from the vertica l p osition: door cannot then be opened from insid e. As pherical ex terior mirror 3 Increases the field of view. Estima ting the distance away of vehicles following y ou is only possible to a limited ex tent b ecause of slight distortion. Electrically 3: Press n and b oth mirrors will swing in. Press button n again - both exterior mirrors swiv el to the starting position. If a sw iv elled-in electric mirror ha s b een swivelled out manually, pressing button n only swivels the other mirror out electrically. Pressing n again swivels both m irrors b ack in electrically. Fold mirrors out to driv ing position before mov ing away. 46 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows To adjust, swivel the mirror housing. To reduce d azzle from following v ehicles at night, swiv el lever on underside of mirror housing. Automatic anti-daz zle interior mirror 3 Electric windows 3 9 Warn ing Take care when operating the electric windows 3. Risk of injury , esp ecially for child ren. Inform the passeng ers accordingly. If there are children on the rear seat, switch on the child safety system 3 for the electric windows. Keep a close wa tc h on the windows when closing them . Ensure that nothing becom es trapped in them as they m ov e. For the safety of pedestrians, the exterior mirrors will swing out of their normal mounting p osition if they are bumped with sufficient force. Reposition the m irror by apply ing slight pressure to the mirror housing. Interior mirror The electric windows can be used z with ignition on, z within 5 m inutes of switching ignition off 3, Dazzle from following v ehicles at night is autom atic ally reduc ed. With the ignition off, the mirror does not dim. z within 5 minutes of switching ignition key to position 1. Function standby a fter switching off the ignition terminates when the driver’s door is opened. Locks, D oors, Windo ws For increm ental opera tion, briefly pull or press the switch. For a utomatic opening or closing, pull or press the sw itch longer. Pull or press the switch again to stop the movem ent. Safety function If the window g lass enc ounters resistanc e above the midd le of the window during autom atic closing, it is im med ia tely stopped and the window opened ag ain. 47 z Rearwa rd s (green field visible): Rear door switches operationa l Ope rating w indows from outside 3 Depending on the vehicle equipm ent, the windows can be opened and closed from the outside using the remote control in vehicles with power windows in all doors. Remot e cont rol wit h mechanical key In the event of difficulty due to frost or the lik e, press the relevant window switch several tim es until the window is closed. O perated via two or four 3 switches in the driver’s door armrest. The front switches are for the driver’s and front passenger’s doors. The rear sw itches 3 are for the rear doors. Additiona l switches are located in the front passenger’s door and rear doors 3. Child safe ty system for rear windows 3 Hold button q or p on the remote control depressed until all windows have opened or comp letely closed. Switch z between the rear switches in the driver’s door arm rest z Forw ards (red field visib le): Rear door switches non-operational 48 Lo cks, Doo rs, Windows O pen&S tart system wit h elect ronic key 3 Fault If automatic opening a nd closing of the wind ow s is not possible, activ ate the wind ow electronics as follows: 1. C lose doors. 2. Sw itch on ignition. 3. O pen windows completely . 4. C lose the window and hold the button depressed at least 5 seconds. 5. Repeat for each window. Sunblind on panoramic roof 3 To reduce the am ount of glare in the interior. Hold d own button q of rem ote control to open. To close, hold down b utton p or touch sensor in door handle for longer. The electronic key must be recognised w ithin the ex ternal reception range. It is ad visab le for the driver to keep the electronic key to hand. Function stand by after sw itching off the ignition terminates when the driver’s door is opened. Overload If the wind ow s are rep eatedly operated at short interv als, the power supp ly is briefly cut off. The system is protected by fuses in the fusebox – see page 184. To op en Press button G and sunblind opens as far as it will go. To close Press button H . For reasons of safety , the blind closes from its open p osition to approx. 20 cm. Hold down button H to close completely . Seats, Interior Seats, Interior Front sea ts .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Head restraints .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Armrest 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Moving third row sea ts upright .... ..... . Lug gage compartment extension .... . Lug gage compartment cover 3... ..... . Safety net 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Lashing eyes 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Rails 3 a nd hooks 3 in lug gage compartment ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . FlexO rganizer 3... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Floor cov ering 3 in lugga ge compartment ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Notes on loading the vehic le .... .... ..... . Three-stage restraint sy stem .... .... ..... . Three-point seat belts .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Using the belts ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Child restraint systems 3 . ..... .... .... ..... . Mounting brackets 3 for ISO -FIX child restra int system s ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fastening eyes 3 for Top-Tether child restra int system s ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Airbag system . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ciga rette lig hter 3 ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Accessory socket 3.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ashtray s 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fold away ta bles 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Stowage comp artm ents... ..... .... .... ..... . Drink holders 3 .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sunvisors.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Front seats 49 51 52 53 54 57 58 60 49 Adjust seat backrest 9 Warning Imp ortant: Do not sit nea rer than 10 inches (25 cm) from the steering wheel, to permit safe airbag dep loy ment. Never adjust seats w hilst driving as they could mov e uncontrollably . Adjust s eat longitudinally 60 60 62 62 63 63 64 65 68 To adjust, turn hand wheel at sid e of sea t while releasing any load on the seat bac krest. Move seat bac krest to suit sea ting position. Adjust seat height 3 68 69 69 78 78 79 79 79 81 81 To adjust, pull handle on front seat, slide seat and release handle. 50 Seats, Interior To adjust, use lever on the outside of the seat. Adjust lumbar support 3 Lever pumping m otion Up: S eat higher Down: S eat lower To adjust, press button at the front of the adjustment cushion and slide thigh support. Adjust thigh support to suit p ersonal requirements. Seat pos ition Adjust seat incline 3 To adjust, turn handwheel on side of sea t backrest, releasing the loa d on the backrest. Ad just lumbar support to suit p ersonal requirements. Adjust thigh s upport 3 of s ports seats 3 Allow the seat to engag e audibly Adjust driver’s sea t such that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the area of its upper spokes with the driver’s arms slig htly bent. The incline is a djusted by shifting your body weight. Push front passeng er’s seat as far bac k as possible. To adjust, pull inner lever on front of seat, adjust inc line and release lever. Seats, Interior The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back (recomm ended max im um tilting angle approx. 25°). 9 Warning Adjusting the head restraints of the ce ntre se at in the s econd row and the head restraints of the seats in the third row 51 Head restraint position Failure to ob serve the instructions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly before starting-off. Head restraints Adjusting the front he ad res traints and outboard re ar head res traints in the second seat row To adjust, pull the head restraint up or press the catch to release. Then push the head restraint down. To fold the seats or in order to improve visibility when the seats are unoccupied, fold headrests all the way d ow n. If the seats are occupied , adjust height according to body size. To adjust, press button on side and adjust height. If the seats are occ upied, a djust height according to body size. The m id dle of the head restraint should be at eye lev el. If this is not possible for extrem ely ta ll persons, set to highest position, and set to lowest p osition for small persons. 9 Warn ing Failure to observe the descriptions could lead to injuries which could be fatal. Vehic le pa ssengers m ust be inform ed accordingly before starting-off. 52 Seats, Interior Active he ad res traints 3 Re moving the he ad res traints Armrest 3 Arm res t at driver’s s eat In the event of a rear-end impa ct, the active head restraints tilt forwards. The head is more effectiv ely supported by the head restraint and the danger of whiplash in the neck area of the cervical vertebra is reduced. Active head restraints are id entified by the lettering ACTIVE on the head restraint guide sleev es. Press and relea se the two catches. Pull and remove the head restraint. Note Only a tta ch loose objects or components to the head restraint on the front passenger’s seat if it is not in use. Push raised armrest ba ckwards against resistance a nd fold down. The armrest can be moved to d ifferent positions in stages by lifting it. Seats, Interior Armrest in folded-down centre backrest 53 Moving third row seats upright 9 Warning K eep hands away from hinge area when the seats are being moved upright, - risk of injury . The seat belts must be routed through the belt holder as show n in the illustration. The latch plates must be inserted in the holder. Slide centre head rest all the w ay down b y pressing the catc hes – see page 51. 9 Warn ing Pull handle at bac k of centre backrest, fold back rest onto seat cushion and eng age – see page 56. The centre seat back rest can be used as an armrest w hen fold ed down, and contains drink holders and stowag e compa rtm ents. Remove floor covering 3. To erect the seat back rest, pull handle on back rest, straighten back rest a nd engage. Before mov ing the seats upright, slid e seat bench of second row of sea ts forwards by pushing forward the lever at the rig ht or left-hand side of the seat bench. The tip of the arrow at the seat bench must be in front of the square mark. Slide front sea ts forwards a little if necessary. Removing lug gage compartment cover 3 – see p age 57. In the v ersion w ith Flex Organizer 3 – see page 60, the belts m ust be suspend ed in the right and left seat belt ey es on the floor of the vehicle without tw isting, see Fig. 17420 T on pa ge 67. All components must b e removed from the rails in the luggage comp artm ent. 54 Seats, Interior Lift up cover in floor betw een the seats a nd swiv el belt buckles upwa rd s, see Fig. 17386 T. Remove latch pla te and b elt from fixture. 9 Warning The belt must not be routed through the belt hold er when the seat b elt is being worn. Luggage compartment extension The greatest a mount of luggag e compa rtm ent space is ob tained by removing the lugga ge c om partment cover 3 and folding the seats of the second and third row as well as the front passenger’ s seat 3, see following desc ription. 9 Warn ing Keep hands awa y from hinges when folding seats or rows of seats, risk of injury. From luggage c om partment, use one hand to lift seat by the handle, swivel back and move upright until it audibly engages. Use other hand to supp ort top of back rest, see Fig. 17372 T. The back rests of the seats in the second row may only be moved to the v ertical position or tilted forwards in order to extend the lugga ge c om partment. Passengers must not sit in the seats if they are in this position. Move sea t bench in second row of seats to required position and eng age by pushing lever on right or left-hand sid e of sea t bench forwards – see pag e 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit luggage comp artm ent cover 3 b y fitting behind the third row of seats – see p age 58. Seats, Interior 55 Lowering seats in third row into floor of vehicle Removing luggage com partment c ov er 3 – see page 57. Before folding the seats in, slide seat bench of second row of seats forw ards by pushing forward the lever at the rig ht-hand or left-hand side of the seat bench. The tip of the a rrow at the sea t bench m ust be in front of the squa re ma rk . Slide front seats forwards a little if necessary. Guide seat belts through holder as shown in illustration a nd insert latch plates into holder. If the Flex Organizer 3 comp onents are used – see pag e 60, the seat belts of the third row of seats can be unhooked from the floor of the vehicle – see page 67, Fig. 17420 T. Secure deta ched b elt hooks to holder magnets – see page 60 Fig. 17399 T. From luggage compartment, press button at top of seat bac krest a nd swivel b ackrest forward. Raise seat b y handle at rear and swivel backrest further forwards until seat is lowered into vehicle floor. Hold seat by ha ndle during the entire swivelling proc edure. Push down head restraints of seats in third row – releasing spring catches by pressing. Lower b oth sea ts if required. 56 Seats, Interior Folding down backrests of outboard seats in se cond row Folding down centre backres t in se cond seat row Remove luggage comp artm ent cover 3 if necessary – see page 57. Push c entre head restraint down as far as possible, pressing catches to release. Press side knob and slide down head restra ints of outboard seats in second row. Place seat belt buckles in pockets in seat bench. Plac e sea t belt b uck les in pockets in seat bench. Pull upper handle on rea r of centre bac krest, move bac krest to a v ertical position or fold flat on to seat cushion and eng age. Push belt buckles into recess in floor and close cover. Move seat benc h in second row of seats to req uired position and engage by pushing lev er on right or left-hand side of seat benc h forwards – see page 20, Fig. 17367 T. Fit lug gage compartment cover 3 behind second row of sea ts – see page 57. Raising seats in third row – see pag e 53. Lug gage compartment cover 3 – see page 57. Safety net 3 – see page 58. Lashing eyes – see page 60. FlexO rganizer 3 – see p age 60. Push down release lever at one or both backrests, then m ov e b ackrests to a vertical p osition or tilt forwards or fold flat onto sea t bench and engage. To move up rig ht, push release lever down and latch back rest in required position. To mov e seat up rig ht, pull front handle of folded -ov er ba ckrest, mov e upright and eng age in required position. Lower second row and push forwards Remove luggage compartment cover 3 if nec essary – see pag e 57. S lid e head restraints d ow n by pushing knobs at side and releasing catches. Place seat belt buckles in seat bench pockets. Seats, Interior Folding down the front passe nger’s seat 3 57 Luggage compartment cover 3 Do not place any heavy or sharp-edged objects on the cover. Before opera ting the luggage compa rtm ent cover, the rear seat belts must be fed through the side belt holders, see Fig. 17390 T. S ecure unhooked hooks 3 of seat belts of third row of seats to sid e holder ma gnets – see page 67, Fig . 17399 T. To close : Raise seat cushion in second row by pushing handle 1 on right or left hand side of seat bench down and p ushing up seat benc h until it locks into position. Push down release lever 2 at both outboard back rests, ra ise backrests and latch into position. Pull top handle on back of centre back rest, move back rest to vertica l position and latch into position. Push down lever 3 to rig ht or left of seat benc h, m ov e seat bench as far forw ards as possible and latch into position. To move upright, press lever 3 and slide seat b ench to req uired position. Ad just back rest angles and swivel seat cushion down using lever 1. All positions must audibly latch. Pull the cov er towards the rear using the handle and engage it in the retainers a t the sides. Press knob at side and slide front passenger’s seat head restraint downwards. To open: Push front p assenger’s seat back wards. Fold front passenger’s seat forwards by ra ising release lev er and latch into p osition. Straighten front passe nger’s seat backre st 3 Raise release lever and allow front passenger’s seat ba ckrest to enga ge audibly. Notes on loading – see p age 62. Remove lugga ge compartm ent cover from side brackets. It rolls up automa tica lly . 58 Seats, Interior Removing Stow age in front of tailgate O pen the lug gage compartment cover. With the third row of seats up right, stow lugg age compartment c ov er in rear position: insert left luggag e com partment cover into aperture, fold release lever at rig ht-hand side upwards, insert and engage right luggage comp artment cover. Move release lever on right side of luggage compartment cover upward. Lift right cover and remove from brackets. Fitting Insert luggage compa rtm ent cover in aperture, pull release lever at right side upwards, insert right luggage compartment cover and enga ge. Fitting There are two installation openings in the roof frame: suspend and engage rod of net at one sid e, com press rod and suspend and engage at other side. Safety net 3 The safety net can be fitted behind the second row of seats or, if the seats in the second row are folded, behind the front seats. Pa ssengers m ust not be transported behind the safety net. S uspend hooks of net tensioning belts in lashing eyes in floor b ehind the second row of seats and tension, – or – Seats, Interior Remove safety net. Place tensioning straps as shown in illustration and align to net. 59 Fasten Velcro tape tightly about the net nex t to the length adjusters. The length adjusters and net rods must lie flat nex t to each other, see illustration. Suspend hooks of net tensioning belts in slots behind front seats and tension. Removing Raise length adjuster of the net tensioning belt and move belt to one side. Comp ress the upp er net rod and rem ove from the fitting openings. Stowage of s afety ne t Roll the upper net rod down to approximately over the m iddle. Plac e the up per net rod over the tensioning straps next to the lower net rod . The hook s on the upper net rod must point awa y from the lower net rod. Push d ow n low er lever to right or left of seat bench to raise seat bench of sec ond row of seats – see p age 56. Slide safety net into receptacle beneath seat bench, fold seat bench downwards and engage. 60 Seats, Interior Lashing eyes 3 Lashing eyes in the luggage compartment serve to secure items being transported against slipp age, e. g. using lashing stra ps 3, a lugg age net 3 or safety net 3. In v ersion with FlexO rganizer 3 the eyes for securing the removable seat belts must not be used as lashing ey es. The seat belts in the third row of seats m ust nev er be used for securing loads. Rails 3 and hooks 3 in luggage compartment The side walls of the luggage compartm ent house two ra ils. I nsert the hooks in the desired position in the rails: insert the hook in the upper groove on the rail and press in the lower groov e. Pull off the hook to remove. When the FlexO rganizer rails and components 3 are being used (with the exc eption of the pa rtitioning net in front of the ta ilg ate) – see page 61, the sea ts in the third row must b e folded in – see pa ge 55, and the seat belts must be unhook ed from the floor – see page 67, Fig . 17420 T. Sec ure released sea t belt hooks to belt holder magnets – see page 67, Fig. 17399 T. FlexOrganizer 3 Flex ib le system for dividing the lugga ge compa rtm ent or securing the load . When the FlexO rg aniz er comp onents are being used (with the exception of the partitioning net in front of the tailgate), the seats in the third row must be fold ed in – see p age 55, a nd the seat belts must be unhooked from the floor – see page 67, Fig. 17420 T. Secure released seat belt hooks to belt holder magnets, see Fig. 17399 T. Seats, Interior The system consists of z adapters z variable partition net z mesh pockets for the side walls z hooks in the lugga ge c om partment The c om ponents a re fitted in two guide rails in the side panels of the luggage compartment using a dapters and hooks. The p artitioning net c an also b e fitted in the fram e in front of the tailgate. 61 Variable partition ne t Luggage hooks and net pocket Insert an adapter into each rail: fold open the ha ndle plate, insert adapter into upper and lower g roove of rail and move to required position. Sw iv el handle plate up wards to loc k the a dapter. The rods of the net m ust be extended before inserting into the ad apters: pull out each of the four end pieces and lock by rotating clock wise. Insert lug gage hooks into required position in rails: to do this, insert hook s in upp er groove of rail and push into lower groove. N et pocket can b e suspended from the luggage hooks. To install, push rods together a little and insert into the relev ant openings in the adapters. The long er rod must be inserted into the upper a dapter. P artitioning ne t in front of tailgate 62 Seats, Interior The p artitioning net c an be fitted in the recesses in the p anel in front of the tailgate with the third row of seats upright. This prevents the load from falling out when the tailgate is op ened . Notes on loading the vehicle z Close the lugga ge compartment cover 3 to prevent the objects from being reflected in the rear window. The four rod end pieces of the net m ust be pushed in before installation by rotating each end piece antic lock wise and pushing in. z If the b ackrests are not folded down when transp orting objects in the lug gage compartment, they must b e engaged in their upright position – see page 56. To install, push rods of partitioning net together a little and insert into the relevant openings in the panel. The longer rod must be inserted a t the top. For easier loading with the third row of seats upright, first insert the rod, load the luggage compartment and then insert the upper rod . Removing Push rod of pa rtitioning net together and rem ov e from the adapters and the recesses in the p anel. Adapter: fold op en the reta iner, release the adap ter from the lower groove and remov e from the upp er groove. Disengage luggage hook from the rails. Floor covering 3 in luggage compartment When the third row of seats is not in use and are –folded away – a cover ca n be placed over the luggag e com partment floor. z When transporting objects in the lug gage comp artment, fit safety net 3 – see page 58. z Heavy objects in the luggag e compa rtm ent should b e plac ed a gainst the engaged rear seat bac krests or, if the rea r seat bac krests a re folded down, against the front seat ba ckrests. If objec ts are to be stacked , the heavier objec ts should b e plac ed at the bottom. Unsecured objects in the luggag e compa rtm ent would be thrown forw ards with great forc e in the event of heav y braking, for exa mple. z Secure heavy objects with lashing straps 3 attached to lashing eyes – see page 60. If heav y loads slip when the vehicle is braked heavily or driven around a bend, the handling of the vehicle m ay change. z Secure loose a rticles in lugg age compa rtm ent using FlexOrga nizer 3 or luggage net 3 to prevent sliding. z Do not allow the load to protrude above the upper edg e of the backrests of the seats in the second row or, if the second row seats have been removed, above the up per edge of the front seat bac krests. z The warning triangle 3 and first-aid kit (cushion) 3 must always be freely accessible. z Do not place any objects on the luggage compartment cover 3 and on the instrument pa nel. They are reflected in the glass, obstruct the driver’ s view and will be thrown through the vehicle in the event of hard braking, for exam ple. z Objects m ust not be stored in the a irb ag inflation area, because they could cause injury if the airbag system is trig gered. z The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, handbrake and gear selector, or hinder the freedom of movement of the driver. Do not place any unsecured ob jects in the interior. Seats, Interior z Do not drive with luggage compartment op en when transporting bulky objects, for exam ple, since tox ic exhaust fumes could penetrate the interior. z Weights, payload a nd roof load – see pa ge 217. z Driv ing with a roof loa d increases the sensitivity of the vehicle to crosswinds and has a detrim ental effect on vehicle handling d ue to the vehicle’s higher centre of g ra vity. For driving with a roof load – see pag es 142, 144, 164. 9 Warning Disreg ard of these instructions may lead to injuries or end ang er life. Vehicle passengers must b e informed according ly . Three-stage restraint system z The front seat b elts are pulled down at the b elt buckles. This means the belts fit snugly , the oc cup ants are decelerated early with the vehicle and the body loading is red uced. z Belt tensioners at the front seats, z Airbag sy stems for driver’ s sea t, front passenger’s seat and the outboard sea ts of the second row of seats 3 . The three stages are activated in sequence depending on the seriousness of the accident: z The automatic seat belt locking d evices prevent the belt strap from b eing pulled out and thus ensure that the vehicle occ upa nts are retained in their seats. Three-point seat belts z The airbag sy stems a re also triggered in the ev ent of serious accidents and form a safety cushion for the occupants. Depending on the severity of the accident, the front a irb ags inflate in two stages. 9 Warning The airb ag systems serve to supplement the three-point seat b elts and belt tensioners. The sea t belts must therefore alway s be w orn. Disreg ard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or end ang er life. Vehicle passengers must be inform ed according ly . Com prising: z Three-point seat belts, 63 Read the instructions supplied with the child restraint system ! The vehicle is equipped with three-point seat belts with automatic retrac tors and locking d evices, allowing freedom of body mov ement although the spring tensioned belts always ensure a snug fit. For information on correct seating position – see pages 50, 65, 70. The belts are loc ked during heavy acc eleration or deceleration of the vehic le. 9 Warn ing Alw ays wear your seat belt, and that mea ns also in urb an traffic and when you are a rear seat passenger. It can save your life! Also, pregnant women must always wear a seat b elt – see page 65. 64 Seats, Interior In the event of an accident, persons not wearing seat belts endanger their fellow occupants and themselv es. Belt tensioners Control indicator v for be lt tensioners Control indicator X 3 for the seat belt – see page 84. Seat belts are only designed for use by one person at a tim e. They are not suitable for persons young er than 12 years of age or smaller than 150 cm. For children up to 12 yea rs of ag e, w e recom mend the Vaux hall child restraint system – see page 68. Belt force limiters Belt force limiters on the front seats reduce the b od y load d ue to dam ped release of the b elt on a collision. This means that the occupants move forwa rd s under control. Inspection of belts Check all parts of the belt system occasiona lly for damag e and function. Replace damaged parts. Following an accident, ha ve the belts and deployed belt tensioners replaced by a workshop. Do not perform a ny alterations on the belts, their anchora ges, the autom atic retractors or the b elt buckles. Make sure that belts are not dam aged or trapped by sharp-edged objects. The front seat belts are fitted with belt tensioners. The seat belts are pulled down at the buck les on a front or rear-impac t above a certa in severity. This tightens the belts. Actuation of be lt tens ioners Ac tuation of belt tensioners is indicated by illumination of control indica tor v, see Fig. 17105 T. If the belt tensioners are d eployed, these must b e replaced by a workshop. Further inform ation – see page 65. The function of the belt tensioners is monitored elec tronically together with the airbag sy stems and indicated by control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for app rox . 4 seconds. If it does not illum inate, does not go out a fter 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driv ing, there is a fault in the belt tensioner or a nd airbag systems. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an ac cident. Deployment of the belt tensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of v. 9 Warn ing Immediately rectify the cause of the fault. S elf-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of faults. Seats, Interior Important z Acc essories and other objects not specifically app rov ed for y our v ehicle ty pe must not be a ffixed or placed within the action zone of the belt tensioners (near the belt buckles) a s this could result in injury if the belt tensioners are trigg ered . z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety reg ulations applicable to this must b e observed. H ave the vehicle d isposed of by a comp any which reuses vehicle parts. Using the belts Fitting the belt 65 9 Warn ing On pregnant women in particular, the lap belt must be p ositioned as low as possib le across the pelvis so as not to put too m uch pressure on the abd om en. z Do not m ake any modifications to the com ponents of the belt tensioners, a s this will render the vehicle unroadworthy . 9 Warning Inc orrect hand ling (e.g. removal or fitting of b elts or belt buc kles) can trigger the belt tensioners with risk of injury. z The belt tensioner and airbag sy stem control electronics c an be found in the centre c onsole area. I n ord er to av oid malfunctions, do not store magnetic ob jects in this area. z When using the rear seats, ensure that the front b elt comp onents are not damaged by shoes or other objects. Av oid dirt getting into the retractors. z We recom mend that y ou ha ve the front seats removed by a workshop in the event of a ctua tion of the belt tensioners. z The belt tensioners are deployed onc e only, indicated by illumination of v. Deployed belt tensioners m ust be replaced by a workshop . Pull the belt out of the retrac tor and guid e it a cross the body, m aking certain that it is not twisted . Insert the latch plate into the buck le. The front seat back rest must not be tilted back too far or the seat belt will not op erate properly. The recommend ed maximum a ng le of inclination is 25°. Mak e sure that the lap b elt is not twisted and that it fits snugly across the body. Tension the belt frequently whilst driving b y tugg ing the diagonal pa rt of the belt. Thick lay ers of clothing prevent the belt from fitting snugly. The b elt must not rest aga inst hard or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing (e.g. ballpoint pen, keys, specta cles), since this could cause injury. N o objects such as handbags, mobile phones etc. must be present between the belt and y our b od y. 66 Seats, Interior To remove the belt, depress the red push button on the buckle; the belt will retract automatically. Height adjus tme nt Seat belts in the s econd row Height adjustm ent of the up per anchorage point of the front belt and outboard belts in the second seat row: Ad just height such that the belt passes ov er the wea rer’s shoulder and rests against the shoulder. It must not pass over the neck or upper arm. 1. Pull belt out slightly. Re moving the belt 2. Press down b utton on adjuster slid e. 3. Move a djuster slide up or down. 4. Allow sliding adjuster to audibly latch. Do not adjust height whilst d riv ing. When adjusting sec ond seat row to enlarge luggage compa rtm ent, plac e sea t belt buckles in pockets in seat bench as shown in illustration. The seat belt for the centre seat ca n only be pulled out of the inertia reel if the bac krest is latched in the rearmost position. Seats, Interior 67 Unhookable seat belts 3 in the third row Seat belts in the third row To ma ke b etter use of the rails and Flex Organizer components 3 in the luggage c om partment, the seat belts in the third row of seats ma y be rem ov ed from the seat belt eyes on the floor of the vehicle when the seats are fold ed d ow n. O pen the cover in the floor between the seats a nd pull up the b elt buckles. Remove latch plate a nd sea t belt from belt holder. When not in use, route the seat belt through the b elt holder as shown in the illustration, and insert the latch p la te into the holder. 9 Warning The belt must not be routed through the belt holder when the seat belt is b eing worn. To do this, press spring -load ed ta b and unhook hooks from the seat belt ey es on the floor of the vehicle. Reel up the seat belt and a tta ch hooks to m agnet of seat belt holder, see Fig. 17399 T. To reinstall the sea t belt, remove hook from ma gnetic holder, push spring-loa ded tab at hook a nd fit seat belt ey e in floor of vehicle. The seat b elt must not be twisted and the hook must be prop erly enga ged in the seat belt ey e with the sp ring-loaded tab closed again. 68 Seats, Interior To move the seat belts for the third row of seats as shown in Fig . 17370 T on page 67, feed through a belt hold er and insert latch plate in bracket. 9 Warning Before m ov ing the third row of seats upright, all components must be removed from the rails in the luggage com partment a nd the seat belts suspended in the sea t belt eyes in the floor of the vehicle without twisting. The belt must not be routed through the belt holder when the seat belt is b eing worn. Important z Unhookable seat belts in the third row of seats are identified by a marker lab el on the belt. z When the seat b elt is being worn, the seat belt hook must b e installed in the eye in the floor of the v ehicle and the seat belt must not be led through the seat belt holder. z The unhooked seat belts in the third row of seats m ay only be a ttac hed to the prov ided eyes in the floor of the vehicle – see pa ge 67, Fig. 17420 T. Child restraint systems 3 z Do not stick any thing on the child restra int systems and do not cover them with any other m aterials. The country in which you are travelling may not permit the use of child restraint sy stems on certain seats. Alway s c om ply with the local or national regulations. z Only a llow the child to enter and exit on the side of the vehicle facing away from the road. When using a c hild restra int system , note the instructions for insta lla tion and use. Se lecting the right s yste m Your child should travel facing ba ckwards in the vehicle for as long as possible. A child ha s a v ery weak cervica l spinal column a nd in the event of an ac cident is less likely to suffer injury in a rearward-facing, semilying position than if seated upright. z A child restraint sy stem which has been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. z Secure or remov e child restraint sy stems carried in the vehicle when not in use. Mounting brackets 3 for ISO-FIX child restraint systems Permitted options for child restraint mounting – see page 228. 9 Warning Never carry child restraint systems on your lap, risk of fatal injury. Note z C hildren under 12 years or under 150 cm tall should only travel in an appropriate child safety seat. z When transporting children, use the child restraint systems suitable for the child’s weight. z The ey es and the seat belts of the third row of seats m ay not be used for lashing load s. z Ensure correct installation of child restraint system, see the instructions enclosed with the system. z There must b e no ob jects in the seat belt hooks. z The covers of the Vauxhall child restraint system can be wiped clean. The brackets located between the backrest and seat cushion are used for mounting IS O-FIX child restraint sy stems. The instructions ac com panying the ISO -FI X child restraint system are to be expressly followed. O nly ISO -FIX child restraint sy stems permitted for the vehicle may be used. Seats, Interior Fastening eyes 3 for Top-Tether child restraint systems There are tw o eyes for central attachment of Top-Tether child restra int systems in the crossmember behind the outboard back rests of the second row of seats. 69 Airbag system Front airbag The front airbag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the steering wheel and above the glove compa rtm ent. The front airbag sy stem is triggered: z depending on the sev erity of the accident, z depending on the ty pe of im pact, The front airb ag system comprises: The strap of the Top -Tether child restraint system m ust run below the hea d restraint between the two guide rods. z within the range shown in the illustration, z an airbag with inflator in the steering wheel and a second one behind the trim panel above the g lov e comp artment, z ind epend ent of side a irba g 3 and curtain a irb ag system 3. Please be sure to follow the instructions provided with the Top-Tether child restraint sy stem. z control electronics with impac t sensors, When using ISO -FIX and Top-Tether for seat m ounting, universally permitted child restraint sy stems for IS O-FIX may be used. z control indicator for airb ag sy stems v in instrument cluster, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the instrum ent cluster. Exception: Front p assenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The seat occupancy recognition sy stem dea ctivates the front and side airbags 3 on the passenger’ s side if the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied or a Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders 3 has been fitted to the front passenger’s seat. For seat occupancy recognition – see pag e 74. For Vauxhall child restra int system with transpond ers 3 – see p age 77. 70 Seats, Interior Ex amples of events triggering the front airbag sy stem: z Impact a gainst a non-yielding obsta cle: the front a irb ags are triggered at low vehicle speed . z Impact against a y ielding obstacle (such as another v ehicle): the front airbags a re only triggered a t a higher vehicle speed. 9 Warning When trigg ered , the front airbags inflate in milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the d riv er and front passenger. The forward movement of the front seat occupants is c hecked, thereby sub stantially reducing the risk of injury to the upp er body and hea d. N o impairment of view will occur, b ecause the airbags infla te and deflate so q uick ly. The front airbag sy stem provides optimum p rotection when the seat, back rest and hea d restraint are c orrectly adjusted: Adjust the driver’s seat according to the occupant’s height suc h that with the driver sitting upright the steering wheel is held in the a rea of its upper sp ok es with the d riv er’s arms slightly bent. The front passeng er’s seat should be as far back as p ossible, with the back rest upright – see pages 3, 49, 50. Do not place the head, b od y, hands or feet on the c ov ers of the airbag sy stems. Do not place any objects in the area in which the airb ags inflate. Im portant inform ation – see page 75. 9 Warn ing The three-point seat belt must b e correctly fitted – see pag e 65. The front airbag sy stem will not be triggered in the ev ent of z the ignition being switched off, z minor frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a side or rear-imp act, Seats, Interior that is to say, if it would not be of benefit to the occ upa nts. 71 Side airbags 3 9 Warning Seat belts must a lw ays b e worn. The front airb ag system serves to supplement the three-point seat belts. If you do not w ear your seat belt you risk being seriously injured, or ev en thrown from the v ehicle, in the ev ent of an acc id ent. If an accident occurs the belt helps to maintain the correct seat position that is required for the front airba g system to prov ide y ou with effective protection. In add ition, the front a irb ag system w ill not be trig gered for the front passenger’s seat in v ersions with seat occupa ncy recognition 3 if z the front passenger’s seat is unoccupied, z there is a prop erly fitted Va ux ha ll child restraint system with transponders. For seat occupancy recognition – see page 74. For Vauxhall child restraint system with tra nsponders – see page 77. The side airbag sy stem is triggered: The side a irb ag system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outb oa rd sides of the front seat backrests. The side a irb ag system c om prises: z an airbag with infla tor in the back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seat respectively , z the control electronics, z the side-impact sensors, z control indicator for airb ag sy stems v in instrument cluster, z seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, z the control indicator for Va ux ha ll child restraint systems y with transponders 3 in the instrum ent cluster. z depending on the sev erity of the accident, z depending on the ty pe of im pact, z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre d oor pillar of the driver’s or front passenger’ s side, z ind epend ently of the front airbag sy stem. 72 Seats, Interior Ex cep tion: Front pa ssenger’s seat with seat occupancy recognition system 3. The sea t occupancy recog nition sy stem deac tiv ates the front and side airbags 3 on the front passenger’s side if the front passeng er’s seat is unoccupied or a Vaux hall child restraint sy stem with transponders has been fitted to the front passeng er’s seat. For seat occupancy recognition – see page 74. For Vauxhall child restraint system w ith transponders – see pa ge 77. 9 Warning Curtain airbag 3 There must be no objects in the area in which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea between the seat backs and the vehicle body . Do not place the hands or a rm s on the covers of the airba g systems. Imp ortant information – see page 75. The three-point seat belt must always be correctly fitted – see page 65. The side airba gs will not be triggered in the event of z the ig nition being sw itched off, z fronta l collisions, z accidents in which the v ehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-impact, z Sid e-on collisions outside the passenger cell. When triggered, the side a irba g infla tes within milliseconds to form a safety cushion for the driver or front passeng er in the respective door area. This substantially red uces the risk of injury to the upper body and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision. In addition, the side airbag system 3 will not b e triggered for the front pa ssenger’s seat in versions with seat occupancy recognition 3 if z the front passeng er’s seat is unoccupied, z there is a properly fitted Vauxhall child restraint system with transpond ers. For seat occupancy recognition – see page 74. For Vauxhall c hild restraint system with transponders – see page 77. The curtain a irba g system is identified by the word AIRBAG on the roof pillar trim. The curtain a irba g system com prises: z an airbag w ith inflator in the roof frame on the d riv er’s and front passenger’s side respectively, z the control electronics, z the side-imp act sensors, z control indicator for airbag system s v in instrument cluster. Seats, Interior 73 The curtain airbags will not b e triggered in the event of z the ignition being switched off, z frontal collisions, z accidents in which the vehicle overturns, z collisions involving a rear-imp act, z Side-on c ollisions outside the passeng er cell. Control indicator v for airbag sys tem s The c urtain airbag sy stem is triggered: z depending on the severity of the accident, z depending on the typ e of impa ct, z within the range shown in the illustration on the centre door pillar of the driver’ s or front passenger’ s side, z together with the side airbag sy stem 3, z irrespective of seat occupancy recognition 3, z independently of the front airbag system . When the curtain airbag is triggered it inflates w ithin milliseconds and provides a safety barrier in the hea d area on the respective side of the vehicle. This reduces the risk of injury to the head considerably in case of a side-impact. The curtain airb ag system does not protect persons in the seats in the third row of seats. 9 Warning There must be no objects in the area in which the airb ag inflates or in the a rea between the seat backs and the vehicle body . Do not place the hands or arms on the c ov ers of the airbag sy stems. Imp ortant information – see page 75. The three-point seat belt must always be correctly fitted – see page 65. The function of the airbag sy stems is monitored electronica lly together with seat occupancy recognition 3 and the belt tensioners and shown by control indicator v. When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for app rox . 4 seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not go out a fter 4 seconds or illuminates whilst driv ing, there is a fault in the airbag systems, seat occupancy 74 Seats, Interior recognition 3 or the belt tensioners – see also page 64. The systems may fail to trigger in the event of an ac cident. sy stem. O nly then m ay a child restraint sy stem with transponders 3 be fitted on the front passenger’s seat. system rem ains activated. Pay attention to the control indicator y for seat occupancy recognition 3. Dep loy ment of the airbags is ind icated by continuous illumination of v. 9 Warn ing 9 Warning Only Vauxhall c hild restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 c an be fitted on the front passeng er’s seat. Use of systems without tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury. Have the cause of the fault rectified im med ia tely by a work shop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system permits rap id rectification of faults. Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 are identified by a stick er or label. Seat occupancy recognition 3 The seat occupancy recognition system deactivates the front and side airbags 3 for the front pa ssenger’s seat if the front pa ssenger seat is not occ upied or a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 is fitted on the front passenger’s sea t. The curtain airbag system 3 rem ains activ ated. The c ontrol indicator for seat occupancy recognition y app ears in the instrument cluster. If the control indicator y illuminates for a pprox. 4 seconds once the ignition is switched on, the vehicle is fitted with seat occupa ncy recognition, see Fig . 17117 T on the nex t page. If a Vauxhall c hild restra int system with transponders 3 is fitted, the control indicator y illuminates perm anently after switching on the ignition a s soon as the system has detected the child restraint Control indicator y for Vauxhall child restraint systems with transponders 3 Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition are also identified by a sticker on the lower panel of the front passenger’ s seat – see illustra tion ab ov e. Vauxhall c hild restraint system s w ith tra nsponders 3 are automatically detected if correctly fitted to the front passenger’s seat. When these child restra int system s a re being used on the front passenger’ s seat, the front and side airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat are dea ctiv ated. The curtain airbag The presence of a Vauxhall child restraint system with tra nsponders 3 is indicated by the continuous illumination of control indicator y in the instrument cluster once the ignition has been switched on and the seat oc cup anc y recog nition system has detected the child restraint system . Seats, Interior If no Vaux hall child restra int system s with tra nsponders 3 are fitted , the c ontrol indica tor m ust not come on or flash as the airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat would not be triggered. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. 9 Warning If the control indicator does not com e on whilst d riv ing , the front and side airbags 3 for the front p assenger’s seat are not deactiv ated, and the life of the child ma y be enda ngered. Fit child restraint system on the rear seat. H ave the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. If the child restraint sy stem is not correctly installed or the tra nsponder is faulty, the control indica tor flashes. C heck for correct installation of child restraint system. To install the child restraint sy stem with transponders 3 – see the instructions enclosed with the system. If the control indicator for Vauxhall child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 flashes when the child restra int system is fitted c orrectly, there is a risk to the child. Fit child restraint sy stem on the rear seat. Hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. If the Vauxhall child restraint system with transp onders 3 has b een fitted according to the instruc tions, the control indicator for Vaux hall child restraint sy stems with transp onders must illuminate in the instrument cluster when the ig nition is switched on. If the control indicator does not c om e on whilst driving, the airbag systems for the front passenger’s seat are not deactivated, risk of fatal injury . Fit child restraint system on the rear sea t. Have the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop . 75 Important z Accessories a nd other objects must not be affixed or placed in the area in which the airbags inflate as they could ca use injury if the airbags are triggered. z Do not place any objec ts between the airbag systems and the vehicle occupants; risk of injury. 9 Warn ing Never ca rry child restraint systems or other objects on your lap, risk of fa ta l injury. z Only use the hooks 3 on the handles in the roof fram e to hang up light articles of clothing or coat ha ngers. Do not place any objects in the pockets of the hanging items, risk of injury . z The airbag sy stems and belt tensioner control electronics can be found in the centre console area. In order to av oid malfunctions, do not store mag netic objects in this a rea. z Do not stick any thing on the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seat backrests or roof frame, in the vicinity of the airbags, or on the front p assenger’s seat cushion, or cover any of those areas with other materia ls. 76 Seats, Interior z Use only a dry cloth or interior cleaner to clean the steering wheel, instrum ent panel, front seat b ackrests, roof fram e and seat cushion of the front passenger’s seat. Do not use a ny aggressiv e c leaning agents. z Only protective covers which are approved for your vehicle with sid e airb ag sy stem may be fitted on the front seats. When fitting the protective c ov ers, make sure that the airba g units on the outboard sides of the front seat backrests are not c ov ered. z The airbag system s are triggered independently of each other depending on the severity of the a ccident and the ty pe of im pact. The sid e airba g system and the curtain airbag sy stem 3 are trigg ered together. See pa ge 74 for exceptions. z Each airbag is triggered once only. Have deployed airbag s replaced immediately by a work shop. z The speeds, directions of movement and deformation properties of the vehicles, and the properties of the obstacle concerned, d eterm ine the severity of the accident and trig gering of the airb ags. The degree of damag e to y our v ehicle and the resulting repa ir costs alone a re not indicative that the criteria for trigg ering of the airba gs were met. z Do not m odify airbag system com ponents, since this would render the vehicle unroadworthy. 9 Warning If handled improperly the airbag systems can be triggered in an exp losive m anner – risk of injury! z We recommend having the steering wheel, the instrument panel, all panelling parts, the door seals, the handles and the seats removed by a workshop. z When disposing of the vehicle, the safety reg ulations applicable to this must b e observed. H ave the vehicle d isposed of by a comp any which reuses vehicle parts. z Persons weighing less than 35 kg should only travel on the rear seats. This does not apply to children who are travelling in child restraint systems with transp onders 3. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, do not place any heavy objec ts on the front passenger’ s seat otherwise the airbag system s for the front p assenger’s seat may b e triggered in the event of an accident. z In v ehicles with seat occ upa ncy rec og nition 3, to prev ent malfunctions do not use protective c ov ers or extra seat cushions on the front passeng er’s seat. z In order to p revent malfunctions when using a Vauxhall child restraint system with transponders 3 on the front passeng er’s seat, no objects (e.g. plastic sheet, stickers or heated mats) may be placed und er the child restraint sy stem. 9 Warn ing Child restraint systems as well as other objects must never be carried on the lap of passengers; risk of fatal injury . If carried in this way , child restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 in vehicles w ith seat occupancy recognition 3 could lead to front passenger’ s airb ag systems not being triggered in the event of an accident. Seats, Interior Use of child re straint systems 3 on the front passenger’s seat in vehicles with airbag systems , but without se at occupancy recognition 3 77 Use of child restraint systems 3 on front passenger’s se at in vehicles with airbag systems and se at occupancy recognition 3 9 Warning 9 Warn ing No child restraint system 3 may be installed on front passenger’ s sea t. Da ng er to life. Only Vauxhall c hild restraint systems with tra nsponders 3 c an be fitted on the front passeng er’s seat. Use of systems without tra nsponders poses a risk of fatal injury. The side a irb ag system 3 is identified by the word AIRBAG on the outboard sides of the front seat back rests. Vehicles with sea t occupancy recognition are identified by a stick er on the low er panel of the front passenger’s seat – see Fig. 17116 T. Sea t occupancy recognition 3 – see p age 74. Versions with front p assenger’s seat airbag can be identified by the word AIRBAG over the g lov e com partment and the warning stic ker on the side of the instrum ent panel, visible when the p assenger’s d oor is op en see Fig . 17118 A. Vehicles with sea t occupancy recognition can a lso be identified by control indicator y in the instrument cluster. If c ontrol indicator y illuminates for app rox . 4 seconds after the ignition is 78 Seats, Interior switched on, the vehicle is eq uipp ed w ith seat occupancy rec og nition – see page 74. Cigarette lighter 3 The seat occupancy recognition system detects Vaux hall child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 and deactivates the front and sid e airbag sy stems 3 for the front passenger’s seat. The curtain airbag system 3 rema ins activa ted. For seat occupancy recognition – see page 74. Accessory sockets ca n be found in the console between the front seats, the console in front of the second row of seats and on the right in the luggage compa rtm ent. Accessory sockets ca n be used to connect electrical ac cessories. The battery is discharged if the engine is sta tionary. There is a cigarette lighter in the console between the front sea ts. Press in ciga rette lighter. Switches off autom atic ally once the element is glowing. Pull out lighter. Accessory socket 3 Vauxhall child restraint sy stems with transponders 3 can be identified by a sticker on the child restraint system, see Fig . 17424 T. Do not dam age the soc kets by using unsuitable plugs. The maximum power c onsumption of electrical ac cessories m ust not ex ceed 120 w atts. Do not connect any current-delivering acc essories, e.g. electrical charging devices or b atteries. Electrical ac cessories connected to the socket must c om ply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in DIN VDE 40 839, otherwise v ehicle malfunctions may oc cur. Seats, Interior Foldaway tables 3 If the tyre repair kit is 3 is in op eration, no consumers may be c onnec ted to the auxiliary socket. Located on the front seat back rests. O pen b y pulling upward until it eng ages. Ashtrays 3 Fold away by pressing d ow n past the resistance point. To be used only for ash and not for combustible rubbish. Do not place any heavy objects on the table. 9 Warning Stowage compartments Failure to ob serve these descriptions can lead to injuries which may be fatal. Vehicle passengers must be informed according ly . Ashtray, front 79 Stowage compartment 3 bene ath front passenger’s se at To empty the a shtray, press the spring , op en ashtra y all the way and rem ov e. As htray socket Lift stowage comp artm ent by grasping recessed edge and pull out from the front. Max imum load: 1. 5 k g. To close the stowage compartment, push it in a nd eng age. O pen ashtray at recess. For universal use in the centre console, the door pockets in the inner panelling of all the doors and in the rear side p anelling. Open cover to use. 80 Seats, Interior Glove com partm ent Stow age compartment for glasses 3 To open, pull hand le. On driver’s sid e: fold down to open. There is a pen holder on the front of the open cov er. Do not store heavy objects in the stowage compartment. The g lov e com partment should be closed while the vehic le is in motion. Cooled glove compartment 3 – see page 117. Stowage compartments in the roof pane lling 3 Press marked locations to op en. The maximum permitted load of the two front stowage comp artm ents is 1 k g, and the maximum permitted load of the three stowage compartments in the rear is 2 kg. The stowage compa rtm ents must b e closed whilst driving. Seats, Interior Stowage com partm ents in the luggage compartment Drink holders 3 81 More drink holders can be found in the centre back rest in the second seat row in the folded-down position. Fold centre backrest forwards by pulling handle on rear of centre back rest. Sunvisors The sunvisors can b e folded down or swivelled to the side to prevent d azzling. While travelling, the covers for the m irrors in the sunvisors should be closed . The v ehicle tools with jack 3 and towing eye and the trailer coup ling ball bar 3 are stow ed beneath a hatch in the vehicle floor at the rear. To open the ha tc h, lift the carpeting then raise, rotate and lift the ring. The fusebox is behind the left hatch in the luggage compartment sid e pa nelling – see page 184. The tyre repa ir k it is on the right-hand side behind the flap 3 – see page 179. For first-aid kit (cushion), w arning triangle in the lugga ge com partment – see page 174. Drink holders can be found a t the front in the centre console between the front seats, the door pockets in the inner panelling of all the doors and in the rear side panelling. 82 In struments, Controls Instruments, Controls Control indicators .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 82 Instrument display ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 87 Information display . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 89 Warning buzzers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 102 Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 102 Control indicators The control indica tors described here are not present in all vehicles. The descriptions however, apply to all instrument versions. In struments, Controls The c ontrol indicator colours mean: z Red Dang er, im porta nt reminder, z Yellow z Green Warning, information, fault, Confirm ation of ac tiv ation, z Blue Confirm ation of ac tiv ation. 0 Open&Start system 3, fault Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. If i t flashes Sy stem has not detected electronic k ey in vehic le interior. The reasons for this may be: – – The electronic key is in the wrong location in the vehicle interior (do not put key in lugga ge com partment or in front of information disp la y), or the electronic key is not in the v ehicle interior, or influence from an external interference source (radio m asts, interfering transmitters in the v icinity ). or Electronic key failure, for emergency operation – see page 35. If the battery in the electronic key needs changing, I nS P3 a ppears in the service display or in v ehicles with check control 3 by an appropriate message in the inform ation d isplay – see pag e 36. Illumi nated Fault in O pen&Start system . Where necessary, lock or unlock the vehicle w ith the remote control or emergency key – see page 37, or attempt to activate using the spare key. Emergency operation – see pa ge 35. If 0 illumina tes, this can also mean that the steering column lock is still locked: move steering wheel to and fro a little and press Start/S top button a gain. If 0 illumina tes whilst d riv ing a system error has occurred that ma y eventually lead to a complete failure. If 0 illum inates or fla shes: The Start/Stop button must be held depressed slightly longer to switch off the ignition. It is possible that the vehic le will not start during the nex t start a ttempt. If 0 stay s on p ermanently or continues to flash, seek the assistance of a workshop immed iately. 83 I Engine oil press ure C ontrol indicator illuminates red. It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and g oes out shortly after the engine starts. I lluminat es when the engine is running Eng ine lubrication m ay be interrup ted. This ma y result in damage to the engine and/or locking of the drive wheels: 1. Move out of the flow of traffic a s quickly as possible without impeding other vehicles. 2. Depress clutch. 3. Shift manual transm ission or Easytronic 3 into neutral; for a utomatic tra nsmission 3 , set selector lever to N. 4. Switch off ignition. 9 Warn ing When the engine is off, considerably more force is needed to brake and steer. Do not rem ove key until vehicle has come to a standstill, otherw ise the steering colum n lock could enga ge unex pectedly. C heck oil level before consulting a workshop. 84 In struments, Controls R Brake s yste m, clutch sys tem 3 Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. It illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrak e is applied or if the brake or clutch fluid level is too low. Further inform ation – see pages 158, 205. For vehicles w ith Easytronic 3, the control indicator flashes for a few seconds when the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is not applied. 9 Warning Illum inated when the handbrake is off: stop, im med ia tely stop journey. Seek the assistance of a workshop. v Airbag s yste ms 3, belt tensioners 3 v Electronic Stability Programme (ESP ®P lus) 3 Control indica tor flashes or illuminates yellow. Fla shing during dr iving: System actively enga ged – see page 148. Illumi nates whilst dr iving The sy stem is off 3 or there is a fa ult in the Elec tronic S tability Programme system – see p age 148. X Se at belt 3 Control indicator illuminates or flashes red. Once the ignition is switched on, this stays on until the seat belt is fastened. The control indicator flashes when starting to drive. Control indicator illum inates red. Fasten sea t belt – see page 63. Ill uminates when the eng ine is runni ng Fault in airbag system or belt tensioners – see pages 64, 73. Q Door ope n Control indica tor illuminates red. It illum ina tes when a door or the luggage compartment is open. p Alternator C ontrol indicator illuminates red. It illuminates w hen the ignition is switched on and g oes out shortly after the engine starts. I lluminat es when the engine is running S top and switch off engine. Battery is not charging. Engine cooling ma y be interrupted . In diesel eng ines, p ow er to the brak e serv o unit m ay be cut. C heck drive belt condition a nd tensioning before contacting a w ork shop. W Coolant temperature C ontrol indicator illuminates red. I lluminat es when the engine is running S top and switch off engine. Coolant temperature too hig h: Danger of engine dam age. Check coolant lev el – see pag e 204. In struments, Controls A Engine ele ctronics, transmission electronics 3, im mobilis er, die sel fuel filte r 3, fault Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. It illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on. Ill uminates when the eng ine is runni ng Fault in the engine electronics or transm ission electronics system. Electronic s switch to emergency running program me, fuel consum ption may increase and the drivability of the vehicle ma y be impaired – see page 147. I mmediately seek the assistance of a workshop. Illuminated tog ether w ith I nSP4 in the service display: Have the d iesel fuel filter drained of water – see page 203. If i t flashes w hen t he i gnition is on Fault in the electronic immobiliser system; the engine ca nnot be started – see page 30. IDS+ Inte ractive Dynamic Driving Sys tem 3, Continuous Damping Control (CDC) 3, SP ORT m ode 3 8 Exterior lights C ontrol indicator illuminates green. Control indica tor illuminates y ellow. It is illuminated when the exterior lights are on – see pag e 105. It illum ina tes for a few seconds when the ignition is switc hed on. r Illumi nates whilst dr iving Fault in the sy stem. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop. IDS+ – see page 148, C DC – see page 150, SPORT mode – see page 150. P arking distance s ens ors 3 C ontrol indicator illuminates yellow . Fault in the system. Seek the assistance of a work shop. Parking distance sensors – see page 152. O S Engine oil le vel 3 Control indica tor illuminates y ellow. The engine oil lev el is autom atic ally. check ed1 ) Illumi nates when the engine is running Engine oil level too low . Check engine oil level and top up engine oil if necessa ry – see p age 202. j Turn s ignal lights C ontrol indicator flashes green. The corresp onding c ontrol indicator flashes on the side selected. Both control indic ators flash with the hazard warning lights on. Fast flashing: failure of a turn signal light or associa ted fuse, failure of turn signal light on trailer 3. C ha nge bulbs – see pa ge 187. Fuses – see page 184. Easytronic 3, start engine Control indicator illum inates yellow. It illuminates if the footbrak e is not opera ted. The indica tor goes off a s soon as the footbrake is operated. The engine ca n only be started w ith the footbrak e opera ted – see page 131. 1) 85 N ot for Z 20 LEH engine, for s ales d esig na tion – see p ag e 212. 86 In struments, Controls Y Fuel level Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. Ill uminated Low fuel level, fuel gauge in reserv e area. If i t flashes Fuel supply exhausted, refuel immediately . Never let the tank run dry! Erratic fuel supp ly can cause catalytic converter to overheat – see p age 146. Diesel engines: If the tank is run d ry , bleed the fuel sy stem as described on page 170. > Front fog lights 3 Control indicator illum inates green. It is illuminated when the front fog lights are on – see page 106. T Winter programme of autom atic transmission 3 or Eas ytronic 3 Control indica tor is illuminated in tra nsmission display when Winter prog ra mme is enabled – see pages 133, 139. 1 SP ORT m ode of autom atic transmission 3 or Eas ytronic 3 Control indica tor is illuminated in tra nsmission display when SPO RT mode is enabled – see pa ges 133, 138. I lluminat es whi lst driv ing Fault in Anti-lock Bra ke System – see pag e 159. If it fl ashes Fault in system or child restraint with tra nsponder not correctly fitted – see p age 74. r Z Control indicator illum inates yellow. Control indica tor illuminates or flashes yellow. It is illuminated when the fog ta il lights are on – see page 107. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) 3 Control indica tor illuminates or flashes in od om eter disp la y. It is illuminated when main beam is on and during headlight fla sh – see pages 10, 105. Fog tail light u C ontrol indicator illuminates red. Se at occupancy re cognition 3 Main beam Control indicator illum inates blue. I f it flashes when the engi ne is running: Fault which may lead to damage to the cataly tic converter – see pag e 147. Im mediately seek the assistance of a workshop. y Illumi nated Sea t occupancy recognition has detected a child restraint system with tra nsponders. Airba g systems for the front passenger’s seat are dea ctiv ated – see page 74. C I lluminat es when the engine is running Fault in the emission control system . The permitted em ission limits m ay b e exceeded. Immediately seek the assistance of a w ork shop. Exhaust emission 3 It illum ina tes when the ignition is switched on a nd goes out shortly after the engine starts. ! P reheating s yste m 3 , Dies el particle filter 3 C ontrol indicator illuminates or flashes y ellow. I lluminat ed Preheating system active, only switches on at low outside temperatures. If it flashes (in vehic les fitted with a diesel particle filter) The diesel p artic le filter m ust be cleaned. Drive on, and a s soon as roa d and traffic conditions permit, increase your speed to over 25 m ph (40 km /h), cleaning of the diesel particle filter is then started. The control ind icator goes out as soon as In struments, Controls cleaning is comp lete. We recommend that you do not switch off the ignition during cleaning. Further information – see pa ge 148. w Instrument display 87 Speedometer In some versions, the pointers of the tachom eter, the speedometer and the fuel gauge briefly rotate to the end position. Tachometer Deflation De tection System 3, Tyre P re ssure Monitoring System 3 Control indicator illum inates red or y ellow. Cont rol indica tor illum inates red. Tyre pressure loss – see page 154. Cont rol indica tor illum inates yellow . Fault in the system – see pages 154, 156. Seek the assistance of a workshop . S peed display. B Odometer display Adaptive Forward L ighting (AFL) 3, fault Control indicator illum inates or flashes yellow. Ill uminated Fault in the system. Seek the assistance of a w orkshop. Indicates eng ine speed. Warning: m aximum permitted speed exc eeded, engine at risk . If i t flashes Sy stem converted to sym metrical d ip ped beam. AFL – see page 108. m Cruis e control 3 Control indicator illum inates green. It is illuminated when the system is on – see page 151. Top line: Trip odometer Display of m iles / kilom etres cov ered since reset. 88 In struments, Controls To reset, hold the reset knob depressed for a few seconds with the ignition on. Se rvice display Trans miss ion display 3 InSP Display of gear selected on automa tic transmission 3 or current gear or mode for Easy tronic 3: Bottom line: O dometer Record s the miles / kilometres travelled. Fuel gauge Pointer in left z one or Y illuminated = Reserve area Pointer in left z one or Y fla shing = Refuel – see page 145 Never run the tank dry ! Diesel engines: If the tank is run d ry , bleed the fuel sy stem as described on page 170. Because of the fuel remaining in the ta nk , the a mount of fuel required to fill the tank may be less tha n the specified tank capac ity . InSP2 InSP3 InSP4 Serv ic e interval d isplay . Display of the rem aining distance to travel until the next S ervice. For more information – see pa ge 200. Bulb failed 3 – see pa ge 187. Battery v oltag e of remote control or electronic k ey of Open&S tart sy stem low 3 – see pages 33, 36. Water in diesel fuel filter 3 . Seek the assistance of a workshop. On vehicles with chec k control 3, a message is shown on the display instead of InSP2 and InS P3. P Park position of automatic transmission. R N Reverse gea r. N eutral. A M Automatic m od e of Easy tronic. Ma nual m ode of Easytronic. D Automatic m od e of automatic transmission. 1-4 C urrent gear of automa tic transmission. ESPoff Electronic S tability Programme 3 off – see page 148. 1-6 3 Ma nual m ode, current gea r of automatic transmission. ESPon Electronic S tability Programme 3 on – see page 148. 1-5 Ma nual m ode, current gea r of Easytronic In struments, Controls For Easytronic 3, the display flashes for a few seconds if A, M or R is selected when the engine is running b ut the footb ra ke is not dep ressed. Information display Board Information Display 3 11:25 } Triple Information Display Graphical Information Display 3, Colour Inform ation Display 3 21 .5°C Range RDS 12:01 17,0°C FM 3 90,6 MHz REG AS RDS TP When the ignition is off, the time, date and outside tem perature can be presented for 15 second s b y briefly pressing one of the two buttons b elow the displa y. Display F in the display indicates a fa ult. Hav e the cause rec tified by a workshop . Ü Board Computer BC 1 19,5° 19:36 All values BC 2 [ TP] 257miles Display of time, outside temp erature a nd date / Infotainment system (when it is on). Display F in the display indica tes a fault. Have the ca use rectified by a workshop. Display of time, outside tempera ture and date / Infotainment sy stem (when it is on). 89 Timer 257.0 40 1 Ø 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 miles mph gals mpg Display of time, outside temperature, date / Infota inment system (when it is on) and Electronic C lim ate Control (ECC ) 3. The Gra phic al Inform ation Display presents the information in monochrome. The Colour Information Display p resents the information in colour. The type of information and how it is displayed depends on the equipment of the vehicle and the settings of the trip computer 3, Elec tronic C limate Control (EC C) 3 and Infotainment system 3. S om e information appears in the d isplay in an ab breviated form. Electronic Clima te C ontrol (EC C) – see pag e 125. Infotainment sy stem – see Infotainment system instructions. 90 In struments, Controls Triple Information Display Display F in the display indicates a fa ult. Hav e the cause rec tified by a workshop . Set date and tim e Outside temperature Slippery road : 8:56 -5 ,5° C 07.04.2004 A fall in temperature is indica ted immediately and a rise in temp erature after a time delay . If outside tempera ture drops to 3 °C, the sym bol : illuminates in the Triple Information Display or the Board Information Display 3 as a w arning for icy road surfac es. : remains illuminated until tem peratures reach at least 5 ° C. -2, 5°C 8:56 5 ,5°C 07.04.2 004 OK In vehicles with Graphic al Inform ation Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3, a w arning message a ppears the disp la y as a warning for ic y roa d surfaces. There is no message below -5 °C . 9 Warning C aution: The road surface ma y already be icy even though the disp lay indicates a few degrees above 0 °C. Infotainment system off: press Ö a nd ; below the d isplay as follows: Press Ö for a pprox. 2 seconds: Day flashes ; : S et day Ö : Month flashes ; : S et month Ö : Y ear flashes ; : S et year Ö : Hours fla sh ; : S et hours Ö : Minutes flash ; : S et minutes Ö : C lock is started. In struments, Controls Corr ect ing tim e 3 Some RDS transmitters do not send a correct tim e signal. If the incorrect time is continually displayed, switch off automatic time sy nchronisation 3 and set the time manually – see below. The a utomatic setting is indicated by } in the d isplay . Dea ctivating / activating automatic time synchronisation: Infotainment sy stem off, press Ö and ; below the display: Hold down Ö for approx. 2 sec., clock display is now in setting mode. Press Ö twice (until y ear flashes). Press Ö and hold down for approx. 3 seconds until } flashes in display 3 and the text "R DS TIME" app ears (years flash during this time). Press ;; display shows: RDS TIME 0 = O ff Press ;; display shows: RDS TIME 1 = O n Press Ö three times. Board Information Display 3, Selecting functions 11:25 } 91 Selection us ing arrow buttons 21 .5°C Range 257miles Functions and settings of some equipment 3 can be a ccessed v ia the Board Inform ation Display . This is done using the m enus a nd buttons in the Infotainm ent system 3 or with the left a djuster wheel 3 on the steering w heel. The corresponding menu options are then shown in the following lines of the d isplay . If check control wa rning m essag es 3 a re display ed, the display is lock ed for other display s. Confirm warning message. If there is more than one wa rning message, confirm them one after the other. S elec t menu items from the Infotainment system using the buttons. O K b ut ton S elec t hig hlighted point, confirm comm and. 92 In struments, Controls Sele ction using the left adjuste r wheel 3 on the steering wheel Board Information Display 3, System settings 11:25 } 21 .5°C System Turn up Previous menu item, Turn down Next m enu item, Press Select highlight, confirm comm ands. Sy stem settings – see pag e 92. Trip computer – see page 93. Press the Settings b utton on the Infotainment sy stem. Menu item Audio or System will appear. Press the left arrow button to access the menu item Syst em . S elec t System menu item. The first function in the menu S ystem is highlighted. The functions are displayed in the following order: z z z z z z z z z Time synchronisation Time, setting hours Time, setting minutes Date, setting day Date, setting month Date, setting year Ignition logic Language selection Setting units of measure S om e information appears in the d isplay in an ab breviated form. Correcting time 3 11:25} 21.5 °C Clo ck Sync.On S om e RDS transmitters d o not send correct time signa ls. If the incorrect tim e is displayed often, deactiv ate automatic time synchronisation 3 and set the time ma nually. The autom atic setting is ind ic ated b y } in the display . To correct time with the help of RDS, select the menu item for time sy nchronisation from the Settings m enu. Mak e the desired setting . In struments, Controls Setting date and time Select the menu item for time and da te setting from the Settings menu. Se tting units of measure Make the desired setting. The setting is saved when the m enu item is exited. Ignition logic 3 See Infotainment sy stem instructions. Language se lection 11:25} 21.5°C English 11:25 } 21 .5°C Unit Europe- SI You can select which units of measure are to be used . Select the menu item for units of measure from the Sett ings menu and confirm the desired setting. The functions are displayed in the following order: z z z z z z z Instantaneous consumption Average consum ption Effective consum ption Average speed Distance Range Stop watch Instantane ous consumption 11:25} Select the menu item for language from the S et tings menu and mak e the desired setting. The trip computer provides information on driving data, which is continually recorded and ev alua ted electronically. Ac cess trip computer v ehicle data by pressing the BC button on the Infotainment sy stem or the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel. Some information app ears in the disp lay in an abbreviated form. Once a n audio function has been selec ted, the sub sequent rows of the trip comp uter function are display ed. 21.5 °C Inst . Consumpt. 31 mpg Board Information Display 3, trip computer 3 You ca n select the display language for som e functions. 93 Display c hanges depending on sp eed: Display in g al/h below 8 mp h (13 km/h), Display in m pg above 8 mph (13 km/h). 94 In struments, Controls Average cons umption Display of av erage consumption. The measurement can b e reset at any tim e and restarted, see "Reset". Effective consumption Range is calculated from current fuel ta nk content and instantaneous consumption. The display shows avera ge v alues. Stop watch After refuelling, the vehic le updates the ra ng e automatically after a brief delay. 11:25} 21.5 °C Display of fuel used . The m easurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 30 miles (50 km) of trav el, the message "Range" appears in the display. Average speed Display of av erage speed. The m easurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 20 miles (30 km) of trav el, the message "Refuel! " 3 appea rs in the display . Stoppag es in the journey with the ignition off are not included in the ca lc ulations. Ac know ledge the m enu item as described on p age 95. Distance Re set: Res et trip computer information S elec t function, operate with the arrow buttons: The follow ing trip computer information can be rest (reset a nd restart measurements or calcula tions): Left arrow button S elec t menu item Start, start/stop w ith O K b utton z z z z Rig ht arrow button S elec t menu item Reset, reset with O K b utton Display of miles / k ilom etres travelled. The measurement can b e reset at any tim e and restarted, see "Reset". Range 11:25} 21.5°C Range 257miles Average consumption, Effective consumption, Average speed, Distanc e travelled. Select the desired trip computer information. Reset b y pressing the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel or the OK button on the Infota inment system. Stop Watch 01:22:32 h O perating using the left adjuster wheel 3 on the steering wheel: Press S ta rt/stop. Interruption of powe r s upply If the power supp ly has been interrupted or if the battery voltage ha s dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer w ill be lost. In struments, Controls Graphical Information Display 3 or colour Information Display 3 Selecting functions FM AS [TP] ��� 19,5° REG C Din Se lection using four-way buttons 95 To s ele ct using the multi-function knob MP3 90.6 MHz 19: 36 The functions and settings of some equipm ent 3 can be accessed via the Graphical Information Displa y or the Colour Information Display . These functions are selected or ex ecuted in the m enus on the display using the arrow buttons 3 on the Infotainment sy stem, the multi-function knob 3 on the Infotainment system or the left ad juster w heel 3 on the steering wheel. If check control warning messages 3 are displayed, the disp la y is locked for other displays. C onfirm w arning m essa ge. If there is more tha n one warning message, confirm them one after the other. Select menu items via menus a nd using the buttons on the Infotainment system. OK button Select highlighted point, c onfirm command. To exit a menu, press the right or left a rrow button to execute Return or M ain. Turn Highlighting menu options or commands, selection of function areas, Press S elec t hig hlight, c onfirm com mands. To exit a m enu, turn the m ulti-func tion knob left or right to Return or Mai n and select. 96 In struments, Controls Sele ction using the left adjuste r wheel 3 on the steering wheel: Function areas System settings 7 FM AS [TP] REG C Din MP3 Settings Time, Date 19,5° 19:36 19:36 Language ��� 90.6 MHz Units 25 . 10 . 2006 Contrast Day / Night 19,5° Turn up previous menu item, Turn down nex t menu item, Press select highlight, confirm c om mands. 19: 36 For each functional area there is a main page (Main), which is selected at the top edge of the d isplay (not with the Infotainment sy stem CD 30 without the ha nds-free mobile phone system): z z z z Audio, Na vigation 3, Telephone 3 , Trip comp uter 3. For Audio, Nav ig ation 3 and Telephone 3 functions – see Infotainment sy stem instructions. 6 Ign. logic The settings are accessed via the Setting s menu. Press the Ma in button 3 (not found on all Infotainment sy stems) on the Infotainm ent system (c all up main display). Press the S ett ings button on the Infotainment system. For I nfotainment system CD 30, no menu m ay b e selected. The Settings m enu is displa yed. In struments, Controls To correct tim e with the help of RDS, select menu item Synchron. clock autom atica l. from the Time, Da te menu. Setting date and time 3 7 Time, Date 97 19,5° 19:36 Time 19:36 Date 25 . 10 . 2006 The box in front of Synchron. clock automat ical. will be ticked; see Fig. 17340 T. 7 13 Languages 19,5° 19:36 X Deutsch English Language selection Español 6 Synchron. clock automatical. Nederlands 7 F rançais Settings 19,5° 19:36 Italiano Time, Date Language Deutsch Select menu item Time, Dat e, from the Setti ng s menu. Units English Contrast Español The m enu for Time, Date is displayed. Day / Night ... Select the menu items required: 6 Ign. logic Make the desired setting. Corr ect ing tim e 3 In systems with GPS receiver 1 ), da te and time are set automatically upon receipt of a GPS satellite sig nal. If the displayed time does not ma tc h loca l time, it can be corrected ma nually or autom atically by receiving an RDS time sig nal2 ) 3 . Some RDS transm itters do not send c orrect time sig nals. I f the incorrect time is displayed often, d eactiva te automatic time sy nchronisation 3 and set the time manually. 1) 2) GPS = G lob al P ositioning System, Satellite system for glob al p osition ing . RDS = Ra dio D a ta System. You can select the d isplay language for some func tions. Select menu item Lang ua ge from the Settings m enu. The ava ilab le languages are d isplay ed. Select the desired la nguag e. S elec tions are indic ated b y a 6 in front of the menu item. In system s w ith v oic e output 3, when the language setting of the display is changed the sy stem will ask w hether the announcement lang uag e should also b e changed – see Infotainment system instructions. 98 In struments, Controls Adjusting contrast 3 (Graphical Information Dis play) Setting units of measure 7 Alw ays nig ht design: white or coloured text on dark background. S elec tions are indic ated b y a o in front of the menu item. Settings 19,5° 19:36 Time, Date Language Units Contrast Day / Night ~ | | | 7 Contrast 19,5° 19:36 Europe-SI Japan Great Britain 12 Ignition logic 3 S ee Infotainment sy stem instructions. Graphical Information Display 3 or Colour Information Display 3, trip computer 3 USA 6 Ign. logic Ü You ca n select w hich units of measure a re to be used. Select menu item Units from the Settings menu. Select menu item C ontrast from the Settings m enu. The menu for C ontrast is displayed. The a vailable units are disp la yed . Confirm the required setting. Select the desired unit. Se tting display mode 3 Selections are indicated by a o in front of the m enu item . The display can b e adjusted to suit the light conditions, b la ck or coloured text on a light background or white or coloured text on a dark bac kground. Select menu item Da y / Nig ht from the Settings m enu. The options are displayed. Automat ic: ad apted based on v ehicle lig hting. Always day d esig n: black or coloured text on light b ackground . Board Computer BC 1 19,5° 19:36 All values BC 2 Timer 257.0 40 1 Ø 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 Tyres miles mph gals mpg The trip comp uters provide informa tion on driving da ta , which is continually recorded and evaluated electronica lly . The main trip computer page provides inform ation on range, instanta neous consum ption and a verage c onsumption 3. To display other trip computer data, press the BC button on the I nfotainment system 3, select the trip computer m enu front the display or press the left a djuster wheel 3 on the steering w heel. In struments, Controls If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 30 miles (50 km) of trav el, the message "Range" appears in the display. Range Range 19,5° 23° 5 Eco x Range is calculated from current fuel tank content and instanta neous consumption. The d isplay shows average values. After refuelling, the v ehicle up dates the range autom atically after a brief delay . Display in gal/h Display in mpg below 8 mph (13 k m/h), above 8 mph (13 k m/h). OK 257.0 40 1 Ø 8 7.0 Ø 31.0 Tyres miles mph gals mpg The following trip com puter inform ation can b e reset (restart measurements): Ave rage spe ed z z z z Display of miles / kilometres travelled. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". Stoppages in the journey with the ignition off are not includ ed in the calculations. 3 3m iles 19,5° 19:36 All values Distance Calculation of avera ge speed. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". Range Timer Display changes depending on speed: 19: 36 Board Computer BC 2 Instantaneous consumption 31 mpg Aver. Consump. Ü BC 1 Ac know ledge the m enu item as described on p age 95. 31 mpg Inst. Consumpt. Rese t: Reset trip compute r inform ation If the fuel in the tank will a llow less than 20 miles (30 km) of trav el, the message "Please refuel!" 3 app ears in the display . 257 miles 99 Effe ctive cons umption Display of fuel used. The measurem ent can be reset at a ny time and restarted , see "Reset" . Ave rage consumption Calculation of avera ge c onsumption. The measurement can be reset at any time and restarted, see "Reset". Distance Average speed Effective consum ption Average consum ption S elec t BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip computer menu. 100 In struments, Controls Stop watch Ü Reset BC 1 19,5° 19:36 7.0 Ø 31.0 19,5° 19:36 Ü Board Computer All values All values 257.0 Ø 40 Ü Reset BC 1 m iles m ph gals m pg Ø 257.0 40 7.0 Ø 31.0 19,5° 19:36 BC 1 m iles BC 2 m ph Timer gals m pg Tyres 00:00:00 Start Reset Options The information of the two trip c om puters can be reset separately , mak ing it possible to evaluate d ata from different tim e periods. Select the desired trip computer inform ation. The v alue for the selected function will b e reset and reca lculated. To reset all information of a trip computer, select m enu item All v alues. After resetting, " - - -" is d isplay ed with the trip computer information selected. The recalculated values are displayed a fter a short time. Inte rruption of power supply If the power supply has been interrup ted or if the battery voltage has dropped too low, the values stored in the trip computer will be lost. S elec t menu item Timer from the Board C omputer m enu. The Ti mer menu is display ed. To start, select menu item S tart. To reset, select menu item Reset. The relev ant stop w atch disp lay can b e selected in menu O ptions 3. Driving Tim e ex cl. Stops The tim e the vehicle is in motion is record ed. Stationary time is not included. Driving Tim e incl. Stops The tim e the vehicle is in motion is record ed. The time the v ehicle is stationary with the key in the starter switch is included. In struments, Controls Travel Tim e Measurement of the tim e from m anua l activation v ia S tart to manual deactiva tion via Reset. Display of current tyre pressure 3 Ü Board Computer BC 1 BC 2 Timer Tyres Warning messages appea r on the display . If there are sev eral warning messages, they are d isplay ed one after the other. Some of the warning messages ap pear on the display in a n abbrev iated form. Exa mples of warning messages for the Gra phic al Inform ation Display 3 and Colour Information Display 3 are shown. On the Board Inform ation Display , messages appear in an abb reviated form. Ac know ledge warning messages as described on pages 91, 95. Una cknowledged warning messages can be re-displayed later. Warning messages: Remote C ontrol Bat ter y check Select menu item Tyres from the Boa rd Com puter menu. The c urrent pressure of each ty re is displayed. Further information – see pa ge 155. Check control 3 Check control monitors some fluid levels, the ty re pressure 3, battery of the remote control, the Vauxhall alarm sy stem 3, the brake light switch and important exterior lights, inc luding cable and fuses. In trailer mode, the trailer lig hting is also m onitored . 101 Battery volta ge of remote control or electronic k ey of Open&S tart sy stem 3 too low – see pages 33,36. Brak elight swi tch check Fault. Brak e light not coming on under braking. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified im med iately by a workshop. Sa fegua rd check Fault. S ystem fa ult in Vauxhall alarm sy stem. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified im med iately by a workshop. Coolant level ch eck OK If there is a fault in the vehicle lig hting, the respective location of the fault is displayed as text, e.g.: Brakelig ht chec k rig ht In v ehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem 3 , if tyre pressure is too low, the display indica tes which tyre to check, e. g.: Tyre pressure chec k rear right (v alue in bar ) C heck ty re pressure a t next opp ortunity using suitable gauge. Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3 – see page 155. C hecking ty re pressure – see pages 160, 220. 102 In struments, Controls In vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 , if there is major loss of pressure in a ty re, the display indicates the tyre at fault, e.g.: Attention! Rea r left tyre pressure loss (v alue in bar) Stop im med ia tely a nd check tyres and pressures. Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 – see page 155. Wa sher Fluid Level check Fluid level in windscreen wash system too low. Topping up wash fluid – see page 207. Coolant l ev el check Fluid level in engine cooling sy stem is low. Check coolant level – see page 204. Interruption of power supply Stored warning messages a ppear on the display one after the other. Warning buzzers When start ing the eng ine or whilst drivi ng: z if the elec tronic k ey of the O pen&Start system is not present or unrecognised 3, Windscreen wiper z if driver’s seat belt is not fastened 3, z if the d oors or the tailgate have not been properly closed when starting-off, z once you hav e reached a certain speed if the handb ra ke is ap plied 3, z if a d efined maximum speed is exceeded 3, z with Easytronic 3, if the engine is running A, M or R with footbrake not applied a nd driver’s door has been opened . To switch on, press stalk lightly upwards. z with parking lig hts or dipped beam on, § $ % & z with the Open&S tart sy stem 3 and automatic transmission if the selector lever is not in P. S ta lk alway s m oves back to sta rting position. Shift to next higher or lower level: mov e stalk slightly. z with Easy tronic 3 – if the hand brake is not applied and no gear is engag ed when the engine is off. Push stalk p ast resistance point and hold : the wind screen wiper stages are run throug h; an acoustic signal sound s a t position §. When the vehicle is pa rked and the driver’s d oor is opened: z when the key is in the starter switch, = = = = O ff Adjustab le timed interva l wipe Slow Fast Press stalk down from position § : S ingle swipe. In struments, Controls Adjustable wipe r interval 3 Automatic wiping w ith rain sensor 3 To set the wiper interval to a v alue between 2 and 15 seconds: Switch on ignition, stalk down from position §, wait until wiping freq uency reaches the desired interval tim e, stalk to timed interval wipe $. To switch on, p ress stalk lightly up wards. The interv al time selected remains stored until it is next changed or the ig nition is turned off. Keep the rain sensor field clea r of dirt by op erating the wind screen wash system regularly. After turning on the ignition and setting the stalk to $ , the interva l is set to 6 seconds. $ § = = Automatic wiping with rain sensor Off The rain sensor d etects the amount of water on the windscreen and a utoma tica lly regulates the windscreen wiper. 103 Windscreen wash sys tem and headlight wash system 3 To operate, pull stalk tow ards steering wheel. The wiper swipes for a few strokes. At low speeds, there is a sing le post-wash swipe. The headlight wash system 3 can be operated w hen the lights are on. Wash fluid is sp ra yed on the hea dlights once only. Then the hea dlight wash sy stem cannot be operated for 2 minutes. O n vehicles fitted with rain sensor 3, keep the sensor area clean. 104 In struments, Controls Rear window wiper and wash system To switch on, press stalk forw ards. The rear window wiper swipes in timed interval mode. The rear window wiper eng ages automatically when the w indscreen wiper is sw itched on and reverse gear is enga ged. To switch off, press stalk forwa rd s a gain. If the stalk is held forwards, the rea r screen wash system switches on for the period of activation. Lightin g Lighting Exterior lights 105 Follow the regula tions of the country in which you are driving w hen using da ytime running lig hts and front fog lights 3. Driving in foreign c ountries – see p age 111. Ex terior lights .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Main beam, headlight flash . .... .... ..... . Autom atic d ipped beam activation 3 Turn signals. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Front fog lights > 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fog tail light r .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Reversing lights.... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Haza rd warning lights.. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Headlight range adjustment ? .... ..... . Adaptive Forw ard Lighting (AFL) 3 . . Door-to-door lighting 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . Parking lights 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Instrument illum ination Informa tion display illum ination ..... . Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Puddle lig ht 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Battery discharge p rotection.... .... ..... . Light covers. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Headlights w hen driving abroad . ..... . 105 105 106 106 106 107 107 107 107 108 108 109 109 109 110 110 111 111 Main beam, headlight flash Turn light switch: 7 8 9 = = = Off Park ing lights Dip ped beam or main bea m In positions 8 a nd 9, the tail lights and numb er plate lights are also lit. Control indica tor 8 – see page 85. If the ignition is switched off with the dipped bea m or main b eam on, the parking lights illuminate. Versions with daytime running lights 3: Pa rk ing lights are on when the ignition is switched on and the lig ht switch is set to 7 or AUTO . Dipp ed beam is on when the engine is running. The daytime running lights switch off when the ignition is switched off. To switch from dipped to main beam , p ress stalk forwards and hold. To switch to dipped beam, press stalk forwards again or pull towards steering wheel. To activa te the headlight flash, pull sta lk towards steering wheel. The m ain beam is switched on w hile activated. The blue control indicator C is illum inated when main beam or hea dlight fla sh is on. 106 Ligh ting Automatic dipped beam activation 3 Light sw itc h to AUTO: Dipped beam comes on automatically w hen the engine is running if outsid e light conditions w arra nt suc h. The exterior lights switch off w hen the ignition is switched off. For reasons of safety, the light switch should alway s remain in the A UTO position. Turn signals Front fog lights > 3 To switch on, p ress stalk up or down. The front fog lights can only be switched on when both the ignition and lights a re on. Stalk up Stalk down = Right turn signal light = Left turn signal light After operation, the turn signal stalk returns to its sta rting p osition. If the stalk is moved pa st the resistance point, the turn signal lig ht remains on. When the steering wheel moves ba ck tow ards the straig ht-ahead position, the turn signal light is autom atically deactiv ated. Ta p signa l: Move sta lk to resista nce point and release to activ ate three flashes from the turn signals when c ha nging lanes or the lik e. Move the stalk to the resistance point and hold for the turn signals to flash longer. Switch the turn signal off manually by moving the stalk slightly. On = O ff = Press >, > illuminates in the instrum ent cluster Press > aga in or switch off ig nition or light Lightin g Fog tail light r Hazard warning lights The fog ta il light can only be sw itc hed on both the ignition and dipp ed b eam/ parking lights are on. To switch on, p ress b utton ¨. On = O ff = Press >, > illuminates in the instrument cluster Press > again or switch off ignition or light The v ehicle fog tail light are deactiv ated when towing. Reversing lights Com e on when reverse gear is engaged and ignition is switched on. To switch off, press button ¨ a gain. To aid location of the pushb utton, the red surface is illuminated with the ignition switched on. When the button is pressed, its control indicator flashes in time with the ha zard warning lights. The hazard warning lig hts illuminate autom atic ally when the airbag is triggered, and also the central loc king unlocks all doors. S witch off ha zard warning lights using button ¨. 107 Headlight range adjustment ? Manual headlight range adjustment 3 With dipped beam switched on, push to release knob and ad just headlight range in four steps to suit v ehicle load . Turn wheel aga inst resista nce and clic k it to the required position. C orrect adjustm ent of the headlight range reduc es dazz le for other road users. Automatic level control system 3 – see page 153. Vehicles without l ev el control system 0 = Front seats occupied 1 = All seats occupied 2 = All seats occupied and luggage compartment load 3 = Driver’s sea t occupied and luggage compartment load 108 Ligh ting Vehi cles w ith level cont rol system 0 = Front seats occupied 1 = All seats occupied 1 = All seats occupied a nd lug gage compartment loa d 2 = Driv er’s seat oc cup ied and lug gage compartment loa d Curve lighting Autom atic headlight range adjustm ent 3 Motorway lighting Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) 3 Control indicator B for Adaptive Forward Lighting In vehicles with Xenon headlights the head lig ht ra nge is automatically a djusted depending on the vehicle load. The Xenon light bea m pivots based on steering wheel position a nd speed (from approx. 6 m ph (10 km /h)). The head lig hts shine at an a ngle of up to 15° to the right or left of the direction of tra vel. At higher speeds and continuous straight ahead trav el, the dipped beam autom atic ally raises slightly , thereby increasing headlight range. If the curve lig hting swivelling dev ice fails, the relev ant dipped beam is switched off. The corresp onding fog light is automatically switched on for reasons of safety. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop. If the control indicator B flashes for app rox . 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the hea dlights have been set to symm etrical dipp ed b eam; see "H eadlights when driv ing abroad" on pag e 111. Door-to-door lighting 3 AFL im prov es lighting in curv es (curve lighting ) on vehicles with Bi-Xenon head lig ht system . Illum inated: Fault in system. The system is not ready for operation. Dipped beam a nd reversing lights 3 illuminate for around 30 seconds after the driver ex its the v ehicle and closes his door. To activate 1. Switch off ignition. 2. Remov e ignition key 3. Lightin g 3. Open driver’ s d oor. 4. Pull turn sig nal stalk tow ards steering wheel. 5. Close driver’s door. If the driver’ s d oor is not closed the lights go off after tw o minutes. The light is immediately switched off when the k ey is p laced in the ignition or the turn signa l stalk is moved back to the steering wheel when the driver’s door is opened. An acoustic signal sounds and control indica tor O illuminates briefly in the instrument cluster to indicate activation. 109 Courtesy light To switch it off, switch on the ig nition or move the turn signal stalk in the opposite direction. Instrument illumination Information display illumination Parking lights 3 Automatic interior light C om es on automatically when the v ehicle is unlocked with the remote control, when a door is opened or when the key is removed from the starter sw itch a fter the ignition is switched off. Lights come on when ignition is switched on. The front p arking lig ht and tail light of one side of the vehicle can be activ ated w hen parking: 1. Set light switch to 7 or AUTO 3, 2. Ignition off, 3. Move turn signal sta lk all the way up (right parking light) or down (left parking lig ht). Brig htness can be adjusted when the exterior lights are on: Push to release knob k and then turn it clockwise or anticlock wise and hold until the desired brightness is obtained. Display mode 3 – see page 98. Automatically switches off after a dela y after closing the doors and immediately when the ignition is switched on or after locking the doors. Front courte sy light Manual operation from the inside with closed doors: On O ff = = Press button c Press button c ag ain 110 Ligh ting Front reading lights 3 Centre switch position: the centre and rear courtesy lights com e on together with the front courtesy light. Rear reading lights on left and right indiv idua lly opera ble with ignition switched on: On Off = = Switch position I Switch position 0 Courtesy lights and reading lights in the centre 3 Entry lighting 3 After unlocking the v ehicle, the instrument and switch lighting come on for a few seconds. Door handle lighting 3 When the ex terior lights are on, the interior front door hand les are illuminated. Illuminated mirrors in the sunvisors 3 The lig hting switches on when the cover is opened. Glove compartm ent lighting C om es on when lid is open. Cigarette lighte r and ashtray illumination 3 Reading lights on left and right ind iv idually opera ble with ignition turned on: On = O ff = C om es on when ignition is switched on. Luggage compartment lighting a Press button a aga in Press button C om es on when the boot lid/tailga te is opened. Automatically regulated centre console lighting 3 Courtes y lights and reading lights in the ce ntre and the re ar 3 S pot light in internal mirror housing. The courtesy lights come on tog ether with the front interior lig hts. To deactiv ate the courtesy lights, press 3 button c . The rear right a nd left reading lights c an be switched on separately with the ignition switched on: On Off = = Press button Press button a a again Day lig ht-dependent, automatically regula ted centre console lighting with ignition switched on. Puddle light 3 After unlocking the vehicle, the number plate lights come on for a few sec onds. Battery discharge protection To prevent the battery from becoming discharged , the c ourtesy light, reading lights, luggage compartment lighting and Lightin g glove compartment lighting switch off automatically 10 m inutes after the ignition is sw itched off. Light covers The inside of the light covers m ay mist up briefly in poor, wet and cold weather conditions, in heavy ra in or after washing . The m ist d isappears quickly b y itself; to help, sw itc h on the lights. Headlights when driving abroad The a sym metrical dipped bea m extends visibility at the ed ge of the road at the passenger’s side. This causes glare for oncom ing traffic if the vehic le is driven in countries where traffic drives on the opposite side of the road. Do as follow s to p revent glare: Ve hicles with haloge n headlight system or X enon headlight sys tem 3 Hav e the headlights adjusted by a workshop. Vehicles with Adaptive Forward Lighting 3 (AFL ) 1. Pull and hold stalk for main beam on steering wheel (headlight flash) 2. Sw itch on ignition. 3. After ap prox . 3 seconds, an a coustic signal sounds and then AFL control indicator B flashes approx. 4 seconds. After the switch, AFL control indicator B flashes for 4 sec onds each time the ignition is switched on. To return to asy mmetrica l dipped beam, pull and hold the m ain beam sta lk again, switch on the ignition and w ait for the acoustic signal. AFL control indica tor B will then discontinue flashing . Control indica tor B – see pa ge 108. 111 112 In fotain men t System Infotainment System Radio reception 3 Vehicle radio reception differs from domestic radio reception: As the v ehicle antenna is relatively near the ground, the broadcasting compa nies cannot g uarantee the sa me quality of reception a s obtained with a d om estic ra dio using an ov erhead antenna. Radio reception 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Remote control on steering wheel 3 . . Twin Audio 3 .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . AUX input 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Mobile telephones a nd radio eq uipm ent 3 ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Infotainm ent system 3 . .... ..... .... .... ..... . 112 112 112 113 Further information – see page 96 and the relevant operating instructions. Twin Audio 3 z C hanges in distance from the transm itter, z multi-path rec eption due to reflection and z sha dowing may cause static, noise, distortion or loss of reception a ltogether. Remote control on steering wheel 3 113 113 Twin Audio provides rear seat oc cup ants with the opportunity to listen to a d ifferent audio sourc e than the one selec ted b y the driver on the I nfotainment system . O nly an audio sourc e that is not currently active on the ra dio sy stem can b e controlled using Twin Aud io. Two headphone connections are ava ila ble, with sepa ra te volume controls. Further information is availab le in the Infotainment system operating instructions. The func tions of the Infotainment sy stem 3 a nd the inform ation display can be operated on the steering wheel. Infotainment System AUX input 3 Recomm ended prerequisites for fault-free op eration: z Professionally insta lled exterior antenna to obtain the maximum rang e possib le, z Max imum transm ission power 10 Watt, z Installation of the telephone in a suitable spot (see information on page 75). The AUX input is located in the centre console, in front of the handbrake. An ex ternal audio source, such as a portable CD p la yer, can be connected via the AUX input. Always keep the AUX input clean and dry. Further information is available in the I nfotainment system operating instructions. Mobile telephones and radio equipment 3 The Vauxhall installa tion instructions and the operating guidelines p rov id ed by the telephone manufa cturer m ust be observed when fitting and operating a m ob ile telephone. Failure to d o so could invalida te the v ehicle’ s op erating permit (EU Directive 95/54/EG). Obtain ad vice on p redetermined installation loc ations for the external antenna and equipment holder and way s of using dev ices w ith transmission power of more than 10 Wa tts. We recom mend that you consult your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who will have brack ets and various installation k its av ailable as accessories and will install them in accordance with regulations. Operation of a hands-free attachment with no outside a ntenna using the mobile telep hone standards GS M 900/1800/1900 and UMTS may ta ke p lace only if the maximum transmission power of the mobile telephone does not ex ceed 2 W in the case of GSM 900 a nd otherwise 1 W. The opera ting instruc tions of the manufac turer of the telep hone and hand sfree attachment must be noted in all cases. 113 For reasons of safety, we recommend that y ou d o not use the phone whilst driving. Even use of a hands-free set can be a distraction whilst driving. Be sure to observe any country-spec ific regulations. 9 Warn ing Mobile telephones and rad io equipment may lead to malfunctions in the vehicle electronics when operated inside the vehicle with no ex terior aerial, unless the current regulations a re observed. Operate ra dio equipment and mobile telephones w hich fail to m eet current mobile telephone standards only using an antenna located outside of the vehicle. Infotainment system 3 The Infotainment sy stem is operated as desc ribed in the operating instructions. 114 Climate Control Climate Control Heating and ventila tion system, air cond itioning system 3 ... ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 Electronic Climate Control (EC C) 3 ... . Air vents .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Heated rear window, heated ex terior mirrors 3 ... .... .... ..... . Heated front seats 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Cooled glove compartment 3 .. .... ..... . Heating and ventila tion system ... ..... . Air conditioning system 3 ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic air conditioning sy stem 3 Electronic Climate Control (EC C) 3 ... . Air intake . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Pollen filter .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Note .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Maintenance ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Heating and ventilation system, air conditioning system 3 114 114 115 115 116 116 117 117 119 121 125 130 130 130 130 Ventilation, heating and cooling 3 a re combined into one unit that is d esigned to prov ide com fort regardless of the season, weather or outside temperature. When cooling 3 is activated, the air is cooled and dried. The heating unit hea ts the air as required in all operating m od es depending on the position of the tempera ture rotary knob. The air supply ca n be adjusted to suit requirements by means of the fan. Buttons for cooling n and the air recirc ulation system 4 a re only present in the version w ith air c onditioning sy stem 3 . Air conditioning system 3 – see page 119. Automatic air conditioning system 3 Climate Control Provides a comfortab le clima te in the interior of the v ehicle in any weather conditions, a t any outside temperature and at any time of year. The temperature and the quantity of inflowing air are controlled autom atically by preselecting an interior tem perature using the tem perature regulator. A consistent, p leasant climate is therefore automatically created inside the vehicle, depending on the external climatic conditions. Autom atic air conditioning sy stem – see page 121. Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 115 In order to ensure that a consistent and pleasant climate is provided in the vehicle, the tem perature of the inflow ing air, the quantity of air and the air distribution are autom atic ally ada pted to the ex ternal climatic conditions and the specified interior temperature. O pen a ir vent: rotate horiz ontal a djuster wheel to I . The settings are show n on the information display . Top and centre air vents in the instrument panel Direc t the flow of air by tilting and swivelling the slats. To close the air vent, rotate a djuster wheel to 0. Elec tronic automatic air cond itioning sy stem – see pa ge 125. Air vents Pleasant ventilation in the interior is controlled by the position of the temperature rotary k nob. To increase the air sup ply, turn the fan to a higher lev el and set the air d istribution rotary knob to M or L . Centre air vents in the instrume nt panel O pen a ir vent and adjust direction of airflow: align slats. To close the sla ts, direct air v ents downwards. Provides ma ximum com fort inside the vehic le, irrespective of the external conditions. C om fort recommendation: directing the flow of air with the slats in an upright position p rov id es optimum v entilation for the occupants in the second and third rows of seats and also efficiently distributes the hea ted or cooled air throug hout the interior of the vehicle. 116 Climate Control Side air vents in the ins trume nt panel and rear air vents in the console between the front seats Heated rear window, heated exterior mirrors 3 O pen air v ent: rotate vertical adjuster wheel to I . With the ignition on, the rear screen and exterior mirror heating is sw itched on by pressing b utton Ü: Direct the flow of air by tilting and swivelling the slats. LED Ü illuminates: rear screen and ex terior mirror heating. To close the air vent, rota te ad juster wheel to 0. LED Ü does not illuminate: rear screen and exterior mirror heating is sw itched off. Additional air ve nts Heating works with the engine running a nd is switched off a utoma tica lly after around 15 minutes. Heated front seats 3 O peration with ignition switched on: Loc ated below the windscreen a nd door windows and in the footwell. Depend ing on the engine, the heated rear wind ow comes on automatically when the diesel p artic le filter is being clea ned 3 . Press button ß one or more times to set the desired hea t output. The control indica tor in the button indicates which of the three hea ting levels is ac tiv e. We do not recomm end prolonged use of the highest level for people with sensitive skin. Deactivation: Press button ß repeatedly until the control indicator goes out. S eat heating is operationa l when the eng ine is running. Climate Control Cooled glove compartment 3 Heating and ventilation system Cooled air is fed into the glove compartment through a noz zle. Set using left-hand rotary knob If glove compa rtm ent cooling is not req uired, mov e slider to the front. Temperature Air distribution L M l J K for head area v ia adjusta ble a ir vents, for footwell for head area v ia adjusta ble a ir vents for windscreen a nd front door windows for windscreen, front door windows, footw ell for footwell Intermediate settings are possible. Open the air vents when the rotary knob is set to L or M. S et using centre rotary knob Red area Blue area = = warm cold 117 118 Climate Control Airflow Ventilation Heating The amount of heat is dep endent on the coolant tem perature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm. For rapid warm ing of the passenger compa rtm ent: z Set air distribution rotary knob to the desired position, preferably position J – see page 117, z Turn the temp erature rotary knob clockwise as far as it w ill go, z Switch on fan stage 3, z Open all air v ents. Set using right-hand rotary k nob Four fan speeds: x 4 Off Maxim um rate of a irflow The rate of airflow is determined by the fan. The fa n should therefore also be switched on during a journey . z For maxim um ventilation in the head area: mov e air d istribution rotary knob to M, open all air vents, move sla ts of top and centre air vents to an upright position – see page 115, z Set the temperature to the desired setting, z Sw itch on fan, adjust fan ac cord ing to req uirements, z For ventilation to footwell: set air distribution rotary k nob to K, z For simultaneous ventilation to the head area a nd the footwell: set air distribution rotary k nob to L. Vehicles with Q uickheat 3: Depending on external temperature and eng ine tem perature, the pa ssenger compa rtm ent is heated more quickly w ith electric aux iliary heating. The electrical auxiliary heating switches on automatically. The c om fort and general well-being of the vehicle occupants are to a large extent dependent on a suitab le v entilation a nd hea ting setting. To achieve a stra tification of tem perature with the pleasant effec t of "cool head and warm feet", turn the rotary knob for air distribution to K or J, set temp erature rotary k nob to any position (in the midrange with stratification of tem perature). Climate Control Heating the footwe ll Dem isting and de frosting the windows 9 Warning Failure to follow the instructions can lead to window fogging or icing and therefore accidents due to lack of visib ility . 119 z For simultaneous warming of the footwell, set a ir distribution rotary knob to J. Air conditioning system 3 As well as the effect of the heating and cooling system , the a ir conditioning system also cools and dries the inflowing air. If no cooling or drying is required, switch the cooling system off to sav e fuel. At low outsid e temperatures the cooling unit sw itc hes off a utomatica lly . Cooling n z Set air distribution rota ry knob to K , z Temperature rotary k nob in rig ht z one, z Switch on fan. Window fogging or icing, e. g. in dam p weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outside temp eratures. z Move air distribution rotary knob to l . z Turn the temperature rota ry knob clockwise as far as it will go (warm). z Set fan to 3 or 4. z Sw itch on heated rear window Ü. z O pen side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. O perate only with the engine running and the fa n on: On = Press n O ff = Press n ag ain C ontrol indicator in button. 120 Climate Control Air re circulation system 4 Convenience settings Maxim um cooling The a ir recirculation button 4 is used to set the ventilation system to air recirculation mode (control indicator illuminates in button). z Set cooling n as desired. z Air circulation sy stem 4 off. Briefly open the window so tha t warm a ir can d issipate quic kly. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M or L. z Air circulation system 4 on. If fumes or unpleasant odours penetra te from outside: temporarily switch on air recirculation system 4. To increase the cooling power at high outside tem peratures, temporarily switch on the air recirculation system . The a ir recirculation sy stem minimises the entry of outside air. The humidity increases, and the windows can m ist up. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates which ma y cause the vehic le occupants to feel drowsy. Air distrib ution to l: the air recircula tion system is automatically switched off to speed up window demisting and av oid fogging. z Set temperature rota ry knob to desired position. z Cooling n on. z Set air distribution rotary knob to M. z Sw itch on fan a t desired speed . z Turn the temp erature rotary knob antic lock wise as far as it will go (c old). z O pen or align a ir vents as required. z Set fa n to 4. Temperature rotary k nob in centre of adjustment range: warmer air will flow into the footwell and cooler air into the upper zone, with warm er air coming from the side air vents and cooler air from the centre air vents. z Open all air v ents. Climate Control Demis ting and defrosting the windows 9 Warning Failure to follow the instructions can lead to w indow fogg ing or ic ing and therefore accidents due to lack of visibility. z O pen side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. 121 Automatic mode z Sw itch on heated rear window Ü. z O pen side air vents as required and direct them towa rd s d oor w indows. Automatic air conditioning system 3 It provides consistent comfort in the interior of the vehicle in any weather conditions, at any outside tem perature and at any time of year. In order to ensure that the climate in the vehicle is consistent and pleasa nt, the temperature of the inflowing air and the quantity of air are autom atically ada pted to the external clima tic conditions. Temperature changes d ue to external influences, such as direct sunlight, are autom atic ally compensated. Wind ow fogging or icing, e.g. in d amp weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outside temperatures. z Cooling n on, the air conditioning compressor automa tic ally switches off in low outd oor temperatures (ice formation), z Move a ir distribution rota ry knob to l . z Turn the temperature rotary k nob cloc kwise. z Set fan to 4. Basic setting for max imum comfort: z Turn fan rotary knob to A, z Adjust air distribution rotary knob in accordance with requirem ents, see next colum n, z Preset temperature to 22 ° C using rotary knob (hig her or lower if required), z Air conditioning comp ressor activation – see page 123, z Open all of the air vents in the front (and the rear air vents if required) 3 . S witc hing off the air conditioning compressor can have an a dverse effect on comfort and safety – see pa ge 123. 122 Climate Control Air distribution Tempe rature pre sele ction Airflow Set using left-ha nd rota ry knob Set using centre rotary knob S et using rig ht-hand rotary knob L Move rotary knob to a v alue of between 17 °C and 27 °C. Intermediate setting s are possible. 1-4 M l J K for hea d area via a djustable air v ents, for footwell for hea d area via a djustable air v ents for windscreen and front door w indows for w indscreen, front d oor windows, footwell for footwell Intermediate setting s a re possible. O pen the air v ents w hen the rotary knob is set to L or M. The preselected tem perature is k ept constant. For reasons of comfort, tem perature can only be chang ed in small increments. No tem perature control tak es place at a setting of less than 17 °C (left-most position) or more than 27 °C (right-most position), but the a ir cond itioning system op erates at maximum cooling or heating power. A x Manual setting of the fan speed, intermediate settings are possible. Automatic control of fan speed Fan off The fa n speed determines the a irflow that is needed to maintain the preselected temperature. S elec t autom atic mode for maxim um comfort. The air conditioning comp ressor is switched off when the fan is switched off. Climate Control Air conditioning compressor (cooling) n s witching on and off O perate only with the engine running and the fan on: On O ff = = Press n Press n aga in Control indicator in button. When cooling (AC comp ressor) is a ctive, air is cooled a nd dehumidified . If cooling or dehumid ification is not desired, switch off cooling in order to save fuel. At low outside tempera tures the cooling unit switches off automatically . 123 Manual air re circulation mode V entilation The air recirculation system prevents the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger compa rtm ent is circulated. z For m aximum v entilation in head area: set air distrib ution rotary knob to M and open all a ir vents. Press button 4, control indicator in button. z For v entilation to footwell: set air distribution rota ry knob to K . The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates whic h may c ause the v ehicle occ upa nts to feel drow sy . In operation w ithout cooling the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. z For sim ultaneous ventilation to the head area and the footwell: set a ir distribution rotary knob to L . To deactiv ate m anual air recirculation: Press button 4 ag ain. The control indica tor in the button will go out. Heating z Select required tempera ture. z Move fan rotary knob to A, fan can also be set manua lly if required: move rotary knob to position 1 - 4, interm ediate settings are also possible. The amount of heat is dep endent on the coolant tem perature and is thus not fully attained until the engine is warm. 124 Climate Control For ra pid warming of the passenger compartment: z Set the air distribution rotary knob to the desired p osition – see page 117. Max imum cooling for extre mely warm interior Demisting and defros ting windows 9 Warn ing Failure to follow the instruc tions can lead to wind ow fog ging or icing and therefore accidents due to lack of v isibility. z Set centre rotary knob to required temperature, recommend ed v alue approx. 22 °C . z Set fan to A, fan can also be set manua lly if req uired: mov e rotary knob to position 1 - 4, intermediate settings are also possible. Vehicles with Q uic kheat 3 : Dep ending on external temperature and engine tem perature, the passenger compartment is heated more quickly with electric auxiliary heating. The electrical auxiliary heating sw itches on automatically. The com fort and general well-being of the vehic le occupants are to a large ex tent dependent on a suitable ventila tion and heating setting. To achiev e a stratification of temp erature with the pleasant effect of " cool head and warm feet" effect, move air distribution rotary knob to K or J, set tem perature rotary knob to approx. 22 °C and open centre air vents. Briefly open the window so that warm air can dissipate quickly. z C ooling n on, z Set air distribution rotary knob to M, z Move tem perature rotary knob to req uired temperature value, z Move fan rotary k nob to A, Window fogging or icing, e.g. in damp weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outsid e tempera tures. z O pen all air vents. z Cooling n on, At settings below 17 °C (rotary k nob all the way to the left), the sy stem c ontinually runs with maximum cooling. When the air conditioning compressor is running, the sy stem is autom atically set to air recirculation. z Press b utton V: in position A, fan autom atically switches to max imum speed , the a ir distribution is directed at the windscreen, z Set temperature to m aximum heating power, i.e. turn c entral rotary knob clockwise as far as possib le (28 °C), z Switch on heated rear window Ü. Climate Control 125 Cooling operation (air c onditioning compressor) is not possib le at low outside tem peratures. To switch off, press button V again, and the a utoma tic air conditioning system opera tes at the previously selec ted setting . FM AS Electronic Climate Control (ECC) 3 [TP] ��� REG 90.6 C Din MP3 MHz It provides maximum comfort in the interior of the vehicle in any weather cond itions, at any outside temperature and a t any time of year. To ensure a constant and com fortable climate in the v ehicle, the tempera ture of the inflowing air, the airflow rate a nd the air distrib ution are cha nged automatically according to clim atic conditions outside the v ehicle. The Electronic C lim ate C ontrol (ECC) automatically cools to the specified value with the m aximum cooling p ow er. Tem perature cha ng es due to externa l influences, such as direct sunlig ht, are automatically compensated. Data is show n on the informa tion display . Setting modifications are briefly shown in the information display, superim posed over the currently display ed menu. The display can vary ac cord ing to the type of presentation – see p age 89. The settings in the Electronic Climate Control are stored in the vehicle key when the vehicle is locked, see "S tore personal settings in vehicle k ey" – see pa ge 31. With va rious rem ote controls, stored settings are automatically retrieved by using the relev ant remote control. Manua l settings, e.g. operating w ithout cooling, and air distribution can be selected using the menu – see page 126. When the cooling unit (a ir cond itioning compressor) is on, the air is cooled and dehumidified. The pollen filter removes d ust, soot, pollen and spores from the inflowing outside air. The autom atic air rec irculation system has an air quality sensor 3 to detect harmful gases in the outside air, in which case it will switch autom atically to air recirc ulation. When set to automa tic mode, the Electronic Clima te C ontrol provides the optimum settings for practically all conditions. If so desired, the Electronic C lim ate Control c an be manually adjusted. The Elec tronic C limate Control is only fully operational w hen the engine is running. At low outsid e temperatures the cooling unit (cooling com pressor) switches off automatically. 126 Climate Control Autom atic m ode Automatic air re circulation mode 3 The ventilation system is set to air recirculation mode and interior air is recirculated. The autom atic air recirculation system ha s an air quality sensor to detect harmful gases in the outside air, in which case it w ill switch automatically to air rec irculation. If outside temp eratures are low and cooling (air c onditioning compressor) is switched off, automatic air recircula tion is only av ailable in a limited capacity so as to prevent the wind ow s from misting. Activate air recirculation manually if so desired. Basic setting for max imum comfort: z Press AUTO button, z Open all air vents, z Air conditioning compressor activation – see pa ge 127, z Set preselected temperature to 22 °C using left-hand rotary k nob. The temp erature can be set higher or low er as desired. Switching off the AC compressor (Eco appears in disp la y) can reduce com fort and affect sa fety – see page 127. All air vents a re actuated automatically in automatic mode. The air vents should therefore alway s b e open – see pag e 115. Switching autom atic air recirculation on or off – see page 129. Manua l air recirculation mode – see page 129. If a temp erature b elow 16 °C is set, Lo app ears in the display : the Electronic C lim ate C ontrol runs constantly at ma ximum cooling power. The temperature is not regulated. If a temp erature a bove 28 °C is set, Hi app ears in the display : the Electronic C lim ate C ontrol runs constantly at ma ximum heating power. The tem perature is not regulated. Manual settings Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Tempe rature pre sele ction The left-hand rotary k nob can be used to set tem peratures between 16 °C and 28 °C. For reasons of comfort, tem perature can only be chang ed in small increments. Vehicles with Quickheat 3: Depend ing on externa l temp erature a nd engine temperature, the passenger compartment is heated more quickly with electric auxiliary heating. Under certain circumstances (e.g. icy or misted windows), the func tions of the Electronic Climate Control can be adjusted ma nually. The elec trica l auxiliary heating switches on autom atic ally. Electronic Clima te C ontrol settings can be changed via the centre knob, the buttons and the menus shown on the display. Press the centre knob to call up the m enu. The menu for manual Electronic Clima te C ontrol settings appears in the display. Climate Control Air distribut. To return to automatic m ode: press button V or AUTO . Dem isting and de frosting the windows Heated rear w indow – see page 116. 9 Warning Failure to follow the instructions can lead to window fogging or icing and therefore accidents due to lack of visib ility . FM AS [TP] ��� REG C Din 127 MP3 Switch air conditioning compres sor on and off Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Air conditioning on / off 90.6 MHz Individual m enu item s a re highlighted b y turning the centre knob and selected by pressing it. Selecting certain menus by pressing the knob will open a submenu 3. To ex it a m enu, turn the centre knob left or right to Return or Ma in and select. Window fogging or icing, e. g. in dam p weather, because of wet clothing or due to low outside temp eratures. Press V button. V appears in display : Control indica tor in b utton illuminates. The tem perature and the a ir distribution are adjusted autom atically, the fan runs at a faster sp eed and the windows are rapidly cleared of ice and moisture. The airflow can be increa sed or decreased by turning the right-hand knob. If no cooling or dehum idifica tion is required, switch the air conditioning compressor off (max imum energy sa vings): Highlight menu item A C from the manual settings menu and select b y pressing the knob. Eco appea rs on the display . Inflowing air is neither c ooled nor dehum idified. This restricts the lev el of comfort provided by the Electronic Clima te C ontrol. This may cause the windows to mist up, for exam ple. To activa te cooling: S elect menu item AC from the manual settings menu and p ress to a ctivate cooling. 128 Climate Control Air distribution Air distribut. Fan control in automatic mode 3 Airflow FM AS [TP] ��� REG C Din MP3 90.6 MHz Press the centre knob. The possible air distrib ution settings appear one after another in the display . Turn right-hand knob right or left. The selected fa n speed in indicated with x and the number in the display. Air distrib ution can also be set in the Air distrib ut. menu: At speed 0 both the fan and cooling (air conditioning compressor) are switched off. Top To return to a utoma tic mode: Press A UTO button. Air distribution to wind screen and front door wind ow s. Centre Air distrib ution to vehicle occupants via controlla ble front air vents. Bottom Air distrib ution to footwell. Return to automatic a ir distribution: Dea ctivate corresp onding setting or p ress AUTO button. Automatic blower Strong Normal Weak Fan regulation in automatic mode can b e modified. S elec t menu item Autom atic b lower from the manual settings m enu and select the desired fan control. Depending on the setting, the m aximum airflow, and thereby the noise level, will increa se. Climate Control Switching automatic air re circulation 3 on or off Manual air re circulation mode 129 Air conditioning with the engine not running Climate Air distribut. AC Autom. blower Auto. recirc Automatic recirculation air control at bad outside air The automatic air recirc ulation sy stem has an air q uality sensor to detect ha rm ful gases in the outsid e air, in w hich case it will switch autom atically to air recirculation and the interior air is recirculated. Select menu item Auto. recir c from the manual settings menu a nd switch it on or off by p ressing the knob. Switch to m anua l air recirculation as necessary. Residual air conditioning on The air recirculation system minim ises the entry of outside air and the air in the passenger compa rtm ent is recirculated . Press button 4, the control indic ator in the button will illum ina te. The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. The quality of the passenger compa rtm ent air deteriorates whic h may c ause the v ehicle occ upa nts to feel drow sy . In operation w ithout cooling , the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up. Consequently, manual air recirculation should only be run for short periods of time. To deactiv ate m anual air recirculation: Press button 4 ag ain. The control indica tor in the button will go out. When the vehicle is stopped and the ignition is off, the heat or cooling power still in the system can be used to condition the passenger compartment, for exa mple when stopped at a level crossing. Press AUTO b utton with the ig nition off. Residual air condi tioning on will ap pear briefly in the d isplay . The air conditioning will operate for a limited period of tim e. To cancel air conditioning, press the A UTO button. 130 Climate Control Air intake Note If the windscreen mists up during d amp weather, tem pora rily set the sy stem as described under "Dem isting a nd defrosting the windows" – see p ages 119, 121 and 127. Cooling 3 functions most efficiently when the windows are closed. If the passenger compartment has heated up considera bly after a long period in direct sunlight, briefly op en the wind ow s a nd sunroof 3 so tha t the hot air can esc ape quick ly. The air inta kes in front of the windsc reen in the engine com partment must be kept clear to allow air intake. Remove any lea ves, d irt or snow. Pollen filter The p ollen filter cleans dust, soot, pollen and spores from the air entering from outside. The active carbon layer 3 elim inates most od ours and harmful amb ient gases from the air. Replace the pollen filter at the interv als given in the S ervice Booklet. When cooling 3 (air conditioning compressor) is switched on condensation forms, which is expelled from the underside of the vehic le. At least one air vent must be open w hile cooling 3 (air conditioning com pressor) is on in order to prev ent the ev aporator from icing up due to lack of air m ov ement. At low outside temp eratures the c ooling unit switches off automatically. If you wish the Electronic Clima te Control (ECC ) 3 to operate correctly, d o not c ov er the sensor on the instrum ent panel. Maintenance In order to ensure continuously efficient performa nc e, the air conditioning compressor 3 must b e operated for a few minutes once a month, irrespectiv e of the weather and tim e of y ear. The Electronic C lim ate C ontrol (ECC ), if present, ha ndles this autom atically whilst driving. Air conditioning com pressor operation is not possible when outsid e temperatures are low. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop in the event of faults. Driving an d Operation Driving and Operation Easytronic 3 131 Starting the engine The semi-automatic Easytronic manual tra nsmission permits manua l (Manua l mode) or a utomatic gearshifting (Automatic m ode), b oth w ith a utomatic clutch c ontrol. 9 Warning Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life. Transmission display Ea sy tronic 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Autom atic transm ission 3 .... .... .... ..... . Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Sav ing fuel, protecting the environment . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuel consump tion, fuel, refuelling ..... . Ca ta lytic converter, exhaust g ases... . Drive Control System s .. .... ..... .... .... ..... . Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Anti-lock Brake Sy stem (ABS u ).. ..... . Wheels, ty res ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Roof racks 3 .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Towing eq uipm ent 3 .... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca ra van / trailer towing ... ..... .... .... ..... . 131 136 141 143 144 146 148 157 159 159 164 164 167 When starting the eng ine, depress the footbrake at the same time. The engine ma y be started only when the footbrake is depressed. I n the transmission display , "N " is shown. If the footbrake is not depressed , the control indicator j 3 comes on in the instrument cluster, and at the same time "N " flashes in the transmission display . The eng ine cannot be started. S ta rting is not possible if all brak e lights fail. Shows the mode and current g ear. The display flashes for a few seconds when A, M or R is selected with the engine running and the footbrak e not activa ted. There is no need to select neutral before starting the eng ine. If a gea r is engaged, the transmission automatically switches to neutral (N ) before the engine sta rts when the footbrake is opera ted. This c an lead to a slight delay in the starting process. 132 Drivin g and Operation Easytronic operation via the selector le ver Starting-off In Automatic m od e, selection of other gears is a utoma tic irrespective of driving conditions. Move se lector le ve r towards A S witc h between Automatic and Manua l mode. Manual gearshifting is possible in Manual mode. "M" and the currently engaged g ear app ear in the disp la y. If the engine speed is too low the Easy tronic will autom atically shift to a lower gear even in Manual m od e. This prev ents the eng ine from stalling . Always mov e the selector lever in the appropriate direction as far as it will g o. Upon release, it autom atically returns to the c entre position. Pay heed to the gear / mode indica tor in the transmission d isplay . Move selector leve r tow ards N Neutra l. Depress the footbrake, release the ha ndb ra ke and move the selector lev er to A, + or -. Easytronic is in Automatic m ode and first gear is enga ged (sec ond gear if the Winter programm e is active). "A1" appea rs in the transmission display ("A2" if the Winter programm e is active). Move se lector le ve r towards + or - The vehic le begins to "creep" w hen the footbrake is released. It is also p ossible to start-off without depressing the footbrake if the a ccelerator pedal is op erated directly after moving the selector lever. If there is no im media te acceleration or the footbrake is not depressed , no gear is engaged and " A" flashes. After a few seconds, the display reverts back to d isplay ing "N ". Then repea t the previously d escribed start-off proc edure. + - Shifting to a higher g ear. Shifting to a lower gear. Driving an d Operation If a higher gear is selected when the running speed is too low, or a lower g ear when the speed is too hig h, no shift is effected. This prevents the engine from running at too low or too high revs. Gears ca n be skipp ed b y moving the selector lever repea tedly at short interv als. If the vehicle is in Automatic mode, when the selector lev er is moved to + or Ea sy tronic shifts to Manual m od e and shifts up or down. The tra nsmission display shows "M" a nd the currently selected gea r. Move selector leve r tow ards R Reverse gear. Engage only when vehicle is stationary. Electronically controlled driving programmes Winte r program me T z By mea ns of delayed gear changing (higher eng ine speeds) following a cold start, the operating tem perature programm e in Automatic m od e quickly and a utomatica lly brings the cataly tic converter to the temperature required for optimum pollutant reduction. z Adaptive programm es automatically adap t gea rshifting in Automatic mode to suit the driving conditions, such as if the vehicle is towing a carava n / trailer, has a high payload, or is being d riv en on inclines. In the ev ent of difficulties starting-off on slippery roads, press button T ("A", currently engaged gear and T appear in the tra nsmission display). Easytronic switches to Autom atic mode and the vehicle starts-off in second g ear. Dep ress the footbra ke, release the handbrake and m ov e the selector lever to R. Reverse gear is engaged. "R" appea rs in the transmission display. The v ehicle begins to "creep" when the footb rake is released . It is also possible to sta rt-off in rev erse without depressing the footbrake if the accelerator peda l is operated directly after movement of the selec tor lever. If there is no immediate acceleration or the footb rake is not depressed, no gear is enga ged and "R" fla shes. After several seconds the display reverts back to displaying "N ". Then repeat the previously described start-off p rocedure. 133 The Winter prog ra mme is switched off by: z pressing b utton T again, z turning off the ignition. In order to protect the Ea sytronic, the Winter programme automatically switches itself off at extrem ely high clutch temperatures. z When SPO RT mode is engaged, shift times are reduced and the transmission shifts at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). S PORT m od e – see page 150. z Winter programm e: Press button T – see nex t colum n. If the Winter programme is activated, S PO RT mode is deactivated. If the vehicle is sw itc hed to Manual m od e while the Winter programm e is active, the Winter prog ramme is interrupted. The Winter prog ra mme resumes upon return to Automatic mode. 134 Drivin g and Operation Kickdown Engine braking Automat ic mod e When driving downhill, Easytronic does not shift into higher gears until a fairly high engine speed has been reached . When braking, Easy tronic shifts d ow n in good tim e. Manoeuvring the vehicle Manual m ode To utilise the engine braking effect, select a low er gear in good time when driv ing downhill. "Rocking the vehicle" Dep ressing the accelerator pedal past the pressure point: depending on the engine speed the tra nsmission shifts to a lower gear. Full engine p ow er is ava ilab le for accelerating. During k ic kdown no manual gea rshifting is possible. When the engine speed a pproaches its upper limit, the transmission shifts to a higher gear during kick down even in Manual mode. Without kick down this automatic shift is not effec ted in Ma nual m ode. If S PO RT mode is engag ed, the drive wheels may spin slightly when starting-off with kickd ow n. This allows for max imum acceleration of the v ehicle. If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, mud, snow or a hole, move the selector lever between R and A (or + or -) in a repeat pattern while app ly ing lig ht p ressure to the accelerator pedal. Do not rac e the engine and avoid sudden acceleration. To ma noeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attempts to park or in ga ra ge entrances the creeping m ov ement can be utilised by releasing the footb ra ke. This applies only to the exceptional circum stances mentioned a bove. N ever actuate accelerator and brake pedals sim ultaneously. To prevent d amage, Easy tronic disengag es the " creep function" a t excessively high automatic clutch temperatures. Stopping the ve hicle In Automatic or Ma nual m ode, when the vehicle has stopped first gear (with Winter mode eng aged, second gear) is engaged automatically and the c lutch released. In R, reverse rema ins eng aged. Driving an d Operation If the engine is running, a gear has been selected a nd the footbrake has not been depressed, a warning buzzer goes off when the driver’s door is opened. If the handbrake has not been applied the vehic le starts to creep. Move selector lev er to N and app ly handbrake. When stop ping on gradients, eng age the handbrake or depress the brake pedal. To prevent overheating of the clutch, do not increase engine speed to ensure smooth idling when in gear. If the handbrak e has not been ap plied, the control indicator R flashes for a few second s a fter the ignition is switched off. With the engine off a nd the handbrak e not applied, when the driver’s door is opened a warning buzzer sounds and the control indica tor R flashes; switch on ignition, engage gear, switch off ignition and apply ha ndb ra ke. 135 Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified b y a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the sy stem facilitates rapid rectification of faults. Interruption of powe r s upply Fault To prevent dam age to the Easy tronic, the clutch is closed automatically at high clutch tem peratures. Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. Ve hicle storage The clutch is not disengaged if the vehicle battery is d ischarged and a gea r has been selected. The vehicle c annot m ov e. Before leav ing the vehicle: z engage handbrake, z remove the ignition key or, w ith the Open&S tart sy stem 3 , rem ov e the elec tronic key from the vehicle. The most recently engag ed gear (indicator in transmission d isplay ) remains engag ed. With N, no gear is engag ed. When the ig nition is sw itched off the Ea sy tronic no longer resp onds to movement of the selec tor lever. Loc k the v ehicle. O therwise the b attery may become discharged if the vehicle is parked for long periods. If the battery is fla t, sta rt the vehicle using jump leads – see pa ge 171. Control indica tor A illuminates in the event of a fault in the Easy tronic system. In the event of serious faults, "F" also appears in the transm ission display . It is possible to continue driving if only control indicator A illum inates. Manual mode can then no longer be selected. If "F" app ears in the transmission disp lay, continued driving is not possible. If the interruption of power sup ply is not due to the discharged battery , seek assistance from a workshop . If the vehicle has to be removed from the flow of traffic, release the clutch as follows: 1. Apply handbrake and switch off ignition. 2. Open and support the bonnet. 136 Drivin g and Operation 3. Clean Easytronic around the cap (see Fig. 17178 T on the previous p age) so that no dirt can get into the opening when the c ap is remov ed. 4. Rotate cap to slac ken and remove by lifting upwards – see Fig. 17178 T on the previous page. 5. Turn the adjusting screw clockw ise using a flat-hea d screw driver (vehicle tools 3 – see pa ge 174) until clear resistance can be felt. The c lutch has now been diseng aged. Do not turn b eyond the resistance, since this can da mage the Easy tronic. 6. Fit cleaned cap again. The cap must b e in full contact with the housing . Towing the vehicle and starting the engine is not permitted when the clutch has been released in this way, although the vehic le can be mov ed a short distance. Seek the imm ediate assistance of a workshop. Automatic transmission 3 Trans miss ion display The automatic transmission makes autom atic shifting possible (Automa tic mode) and the version with ActiveS elect also m akes m anual shifting possible (M anual mod e) 3 . The engine can only be started in p osition P or N . When starting in position N, operate footbrake or app ly handbrake. After starting the engine, operate brake before selecting a gear. Do not accelerate whilst selecting a gear. If a gear has been selected and the brake is relea sed, the vehicle will "creep" . Never operate the accelerator and the brake peda l simultaneously. The selected gear is display ed in the gear display – see Fig. 17022 T. 9 Warning Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life. Selecting D puts the transmission in Automatic mode. In the version without ActiveS elect, only select 3, 2 a nd 1 to avoid automatic up shifting or when using the engine to brake. Moving the selector lev er to the left in position D in the v ersion w ith Activ eSelect activates Manual m od e, and the gears c an be selected manually b y tapping the selector lever to + or -. Display of m od e or selected gea r in left position of transmission display. The gear that has been selected by the tra nsmission app ears in the right position of the transmission displa y. P Pa rk position. R Reverse gear. N Neutral. D Automatic mode. M Manua l mode 3 with display of selected gear. 3, 2, 1 Selected gea r 3. Driving an d Operation 137 In positions P and N the control indicator illuminates j red in the selector lev er indicator strip if the selector lever is blocked. Sele ctor lever settings P, R, N and D (Autom atic m ode) To eng age P or R, push button on selector lever. The engine can only b e started with lever in position P or N . When position N is selected, press footbrake or engage handbrake before starting. Do not accelerate during the selection procedure. P Park position. Front wheels locked . O nly engag e when the vehicle is stationary and the handbrak e is applied. The transmission display shows " P" . R Reverse gear. Only engage when the vehic le is stationary. The transmission display shows "R". N Neutra l or idle. The transm ission display shows "N" . D Drive position for norma l driving in 1st gear to top gear. "D" and the current gear are shown in the transmission display. The selector lever can only be mov ed out of position P or N with the ignition switched on and the footbrake applied (selec tor lever lock ). In selector lever position N the selector lever lock is activa ted after a delay and only if the vehicle is stationary. Gears 3, 2, 1 3 3, 2, 1 The transm ission d oes not shift beyond the selec ted g ear. Press button on selector lev er to eng age 3 or 1. The current gear is d isplay ed in the transmission displa y. 138 Drivin g and Operation Active Se lect (Manual mode) 3 The selected g ear is displayed in the tra nsmission display – see page 136. Electronically controlled driving programmes Shift to a higher g ear Shift to a lower gear If a higher gear is selec ted at a speed tha t is too slow or a lower g ear is selected at a speed that is too high, the gear will not be changed . This prevents the revs from b eing too low or too high. If the engine revs are too low the transm ission autom atically shifts to a lower gear, but not unless a certain speed has been reached. No a utoma tic shifting to a higher gear takes place at high engine revs. For safety reasons, kickd ow n is also ava ilab le in Manual mode – see pa ge 139. – the selector lev er is in automatic or Manual mode 3, – the selector lev er is in position 3, 2 or 1 3, – the footbrake is dep ressed, – the v ehicle is stationary, – the a ccelerator peda l is not actuated , – the transmission fluid tem perature is greater than 0 °C . As soon as the brake is released and the accelerator ped al is depressed, the vehicle sta rts off in the usual manner. Move selector lever out of position D towards the left and then forwards or back wards. + - The automatic neutral is ac tiv ated when: z When SPO RT mode is engaged, the transm ission shifts at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). C ontrol indicator 1 illuminates in the transm ission display . S PO RT mode – see page 150. z Winter programm e: Press button T – see page 139. z Automatic neutral shift function automatically sets the transm ission to N to reduce fuel consumption, e.g. at traffic lights. z The opera ting temperature programm e autom atically brings the ca talytic conv erter to the tem perature tha t is required for optimum emission reduction after a cold start by selecting an appropriate gear (increa sed engine revs). z The adaptive programme autom atic ally tailors gearshifting to the d riv ing cond itions, e.g. g reater loa d or gradients. Driving an d Operation Winter programm e T In order to prevent damage, the Winter prog ra mme sw itc hes off a utomatica lly at high transmission fluid temp eratures. Kickdown Versi on with Ac tiveSelect The automa tic transmission automatically selects the driving program s w ith the best possible braking effect. If necessa ry, lower gea rs ca n also b e selected in Manua l mode to inc rease the brak ing effect. 1st gear has the greatest brak ing effect. "Rocking the ve hicle" If it becomes necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from sand, m ud , snow or a hole, mov e the selector lever from D to R in a repeat p attern while simultaneously app ly ing light pressure to the a ccelerator pedal. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden a cceleration. Press b utton T if you are hav ing problems starting-off on a slippery road surfac e. Acti vati on in version wit hout Activ eS elect The Winter p rogram me can be activated in P, R, N, D, 3 (T illuminates in the transm ission display). The vehicle starts off in 2nd gea r. Acti vati on in version wit h Activ eSelect The Winter programm e can b e activated in Autom atic mode (T illuminates in the transm ission display). The vehicle starts off in 2nd or 3rd gear, depending on the road conditions. To deacti vate The Winter p rogram me is switched off by: z z z z pressing button T a gain, shifting to 2 or 1 3 manually, cha nging to Manua l mode, turning off the ignition. 139 This applies only to the ex ceptional circumstances mentioned above. Depressing the ac celera tor p edal past the pressure point: dep ending on the engine speed the transm ission shifts to a lower gear. Full eng ine power is available for accelerating . For safety reasons kickdown is a vailable in both automa tic and Manual mode. Engine braking Version wit hout Activ eSel ec t In order to utilize the engine b ra king effect when driving d ow nhill, selec t gear 3, 2 or, if necessary, 1 in good tim e. The braking a ction is most effective in gear 1. If gea r 1 is selected at too high a speed, the transmission rema ins in second gear until the shift point for first gear is reached , e.g. a s a result of deceleration. 140 Drivin g and Operation Manoeuvring the vehicle Before leaving the vehicle, first apply the ha ndb ra ke, then select P. Remove ignition key or with Op en&Start system remove electronic k ey from the vehicle. Lock vehicle, otherwise b attery m ay b ecome discharged if vehicle is park ed up for long periods. The ignition key can only be removed when the selector lever is in position P. If the selector lever is not in position P when the ignition is switched off, the control indicator j and P flash in the selector lever indicator strip – see page 137, Fig. S 11560, move selector lever to position P. To manoeuv re the vehicle back and forth during attem pts to park or in garage entrances, the vehicle’s creeping movement c an be utilised by releasing the brake pedal. Never actuate a ccelerator and brake pedals simultaneously. Stopping the vehicle The selector lever can be left in the chosen gear with the engine running. When stop ping on gradients engag e handbrake or depress brake peda l. To prevent overheating of the transmission, do not increase engine revolutions to ensure smooth idling while standing if a gear has been selected. With the Open&S tart sy stem, "P" fla shes in the transm ission display for 10 sec onds with the ignition switched off if P was not selected or the handbrake was not applied before switching the engine off. Fault If there is a p roblem with the autom atic transmission, control indica tor A illuminates. The transmission no longer shifts automatically. The v ehicle can continue to be driven. Illumination of control indicator A may also indicate a problem with the engine electronics – see page 147. With diesel engines 1) Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH, illumination of control indicator A may also m ean tha t the diesel fuel filter requires draining – see p age 203. Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified b y a work shop. Versi on without Ac tiveSelect 2nd gear is unava ilab le. S electing forwa rd gears 1, 3 and 4 manually using the selector lever: 1 2 3, D = = = 1st gear 3rd gear 4th gear Versi on with Ac tiveSelect 2nd gear and the highest gear c an be selected in Manua l mode. Depending on the nature of the problem, only the highest gear may be availab le. O nly the highest gear is ava ila ble in D in Automatic mode. Switch off eng ine if stop ping for a lengthy period, e. g. in traffic jams or at level crossings. 1) Sales des ig nation – see p ag e 213. Driving an d Operation 141 Do not drive faster than three quarters of ma ximum speed. Interruption of power supply Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first 125 miles (200 km ). Neve r coas t with e ngine not running Many units will not function in this situa tion (e.g. brak e serv o unit, electro-hyd ra ulic power-assisted steering ). Driving in this ma nner is a danger to y ourself and others. Brake servo unit If the vehicle battery is flat, the selector lev er ca nnot be moved out of position P or N. 4. Pull loop and move selector lever out of position P or N. 5. Put on ashtray hold er 3 or cover a nd eng age. If the battery is flat, start the vehicle using jump leads – see pag e 171. 6. Attach metal cover with sc rew. Insert ashtra y 3 – see page 79. If the battery is not the cause of the fault, release selector lev er: Engaging P or N again effects lock ing once more. Hav e the cause of the interrup tion of power supply rectified b y a work shop. 1. Ap ply handbrake. 2. Remove ashtra y 3 – see page 79. Release screw on m etal cov er 3 and remove both parts. Vehicle toolkit – see pa ge 174. 3. Unclip ashtray holder 3 or cover: to do this, reach into the opening a t the top edge, unclip the ashtray holder 3 or cov er and remove. Driving hints The firs t 6 00 m ile s (100 0 km) Driv e y our v ehicle at various speed s. Do not use full throttle. Never allow the engine to labour at low rev s. Make good use of all gears. Depress the accelerator ped al a ma ximum of around three quarters of the available p edal travel in all gea rs. When the engine is not running, the brak e servo unit is no long er effective onc e the brak e pedal has been depressed once or twice, brak ing effect is not reduc ed, but significa ntly greater forc e is required for brak ing. Electro-hydraulic power-assiste d steering If the power-assisted steering fails when being towed with the eng ine switched off, the vehicle can still be steered , but consid erably more force is required. Driving in mountainous terrain or with a caravan / trailer The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. S ince a c onsiderab le am ount of heat is generated at high engine speeds and less at slower speeds, do not shift down when climb ing hills whilst the vehic le is still coping with the gradient in the hig her gear. 142 Drivin g and Operation Driving with a roof load Do not ex ceed the permissib le roof load – see pages 164, 217. For rea sons of safety, distrib ute the load ev enly and secure it properly with retaining straps. Adjust the tyre pressure to the load conditions. Do not drive faster than 75 mp h (120 km/h). C heck and retighten the straps frequently. O bserve country-specific regulations. Switching off the e ngine When you switch off the eng ine, fans in the engine compartment may continue running for a tim e to c ool the engine. If the engine temperature is v ery high, e.g. after driv ing in mountainous terrain: allow the engine to idle for approxim ately tw o minutes in order to prevent heat accumulation. Vehi cles w ith turb ocharged engine 3 After running at hig h engine speeds or high engine loads, opera te the engine briefly at a low load or run in neutral for approx. 30 second s before switc hing off in order to protect the turbocha rger. Save ene rgy – more m ile s / kilometre s Please note the instruc tions for running in under " The first 600 miles (1000 km)" and the tips for saving energy on the next few pages. Good, technica lly correct and economical driving ensures ma ximum durability and performance for your vehic le. Overrun The fuel supply is automatically shut off during ov errun, e. g. when the vehicle is being driven down long gradients or when braking. To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect, do not accelerate during ov errun and, if in m anual transmission mode, do not declutch. To prevent damage to the catalytic converter, ov errun cut-off is temporarily deac tiv ated when the catalytic converter tempera ture is high. Vehicles wit h turbochar ged eng ine 3 Flow-generated noises m ay be audible if the accelerator is released q uick ly on account of a irflow in the turb ocharger. Change down! When decreasing speed, shift down into the next lowest gear. Do not slip the clutch with a high-revving eng ine. This is especially im porta nt when hill climbing. Clutch operation Alway s d epress the c lutch pedal hard to the floor to p revent shifting difficulties and transmission damage. When driving, do not use the p edal a s a footrest; this will cause sub stantial clutch wear. Cooling fan Engine s pe ed The cooling fan is controlled v ia a therm oswitch and therefore only runs if nec essary . Warming up Depending on the engine, the cooling fan comes on autom atically when the diesel particle filter 3 is b eing cleaned. Driv e in a low engine speed range for each gear a s m uc h as possible. Run engine wa rm , do not wa rm up in idle. Do not a pply full gas until the operating temperature has been reached. After a cold start, the automatic tra nsmission 3 or Easytronic 3 in Automatic mode shifts into higher gears at higher rpm. This allows the ca ta lytic conv erter to quic kly reach the tem perature required for optim um pollutant reduction. Correct gear sele ction Do not ra ce y our engine while the tra nsmission is in neutral or with a low gea r selected. S top-a nd -g o traffic and driving at a speed too high for the selected gear or tra nsmission ratio increases engine wear and fuel consum ption. P edals Do not place any ob jects in the footwell which could slip under the ped als and inhibit the pedal trav el. To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, there must be no mats in the area of the pedals. Battery care When driving slowly or when the v ehicle is stationary , e.g. in slow urban traffic, stopand-go traffic or traffic jams, turn off all unnecessary electrical load s w here possible (e. g. heated rear window, heated seats). Declutch w hen sta rting in order to relieve the strain on the starter and the ba ttery. Driving an d Operation Saving fuel, protecting the environment Trend-setting technology When dev eloping and manufac turing your vehic le, Vauxhall used environmentfriendly and in the m ain recyc la ble materials. The p roduction m ethods used to mak e y our v ehicle are likewise env ironmenta lly -compatible. Recycling of production wastes keeps the circulation of material closed. Reduction of energy a nd water requirements a lso help s to conserve natural resources. The a dvanced design ma kes it easier to dismantle the vehicle at the end of its service life a nd separate materials for recy cling. Materia ls such as asbestos and cadmium are not used . The refrigerant in the air conditioning system 3 is C FC -free. New painting techniques employ water as a solvent. End-of-life vehicle recove ry For detailed inform ation on Vauxhall’s on-going commitment to achieving a n env ironmenta lly sustainable future, including ; desig n for recy cling, take b ack of End-of-Life Vehicles (ELVs) and the recy cling of ELVs, view www. vauxhall.co.uk/recy cling for details. Drive in an e nergy and e nvironmentcons cious way z High fuel consumption, noise lev els and exhaust emission are often caused b y a driving style that is not energy and env ironment-c onscious. z Y ou should therefore drive with energy in mind: "more miles with less fuel". Reduce the noise level and exhaust emissions b y adopting an environmentconsc ious driving style. This is ex tremely worthwhile and im proves the quality of life. Fuel consum ption d epend s to a great extent on your own personal d riv ing style. The following hints are intended to help you consume fuel at a rate that is as close as possible to the specified levels – see page 215. C heck y our v ehicle’ s fuel consumption every time you refuel. This facilitates early detection of any irregula rities causing increased fuel consumption. Warming up z Full throttle and warming up a t idle speed increa se wear, fuel consum ption, exhaust emission, the amount of pollutant in the ex ha ust and the amount of noise. z Drive off as soon as possible after starting. 143 Uniform speed z Hectic driving significantly increases fuel consumption, the ex haust emissions, the proportion of pollutant in the exhaust gas and the noise level. z Do not accelerate a nd brake unnecessarily . Drive at uniform speed. Avoid freq uent starting-off and stopping e.g . at traffic lights, in short distance tra ffic and in queues of traffic by m eans of clever planning . Select road s w ith good traffic flow . Idling z The eng ine also consumes fuel when idling . z If you have to wait for more than one minute, it is worthwhile switching off the engine. Fiv e m inutes of idling corresponds to ap prox . 0.6 miles (1 km ) of driving. Ove rrun z The fuel supply is automatically shut off during ov errun, e.g. when the vehicle is being d riv en down long grad ients or when braking – see page 142. z To enable the overrun cut-off to take effect and sa ve fuel, during overrun do not accelerate a nd do not dec lutch. z Correct gear selection. z High revs increa se engine wear and fuel consumption. z Do not race y our engine. Avoid driving at hig h engine speeds. 144 Drivin g and Operation Driv ing with an ey e on the tachom eter saves fuel. I f possib le, drive a t low rev s in each gear and a t a consta nt speed. Driv e in top g ear as m uch a s p ossible, shift up as soon as possib le and do not shift down until the engine is no longer running truly . High speed z The faster the speed, the higher the consumption and the noise level. Driving at full throttle uses up a g reat deal of fuel and generates ex cessive noise a nd hig h emission levels. z Slightly releasing the accelerator pedal results in distinct fuel sa ving s w ith no major loss of speed. Driv e at no m ore than around three qua rters of m aximum speed and y ou will use up to 50% less fuel, without losing a great deal of time. Tyre pressure z Ina dequate tyre pressure, leading to higher road resista nce, c osts money in tw o ways: m ore fuel and increased ty re wear. z Regular checks (every 14 days) pay off. Ele ctrical loads z The power consumption of electrical equipment increases fuel consum ption. z Switch off additional consumers (e.g. air cond itioning 3, heated rear wind ow ) when they are no longer required . Roof racks, ski-holders z Due to air resistance, a roof load can increase fuel consum ption by approx . 3.5 gal./1000 miles (1 l/100km ). z Remove them if they are not being used. Re pair and mainte nance z Imp roper repairs or a djustment and maintenance work c an inc rease fuel consump tion. Do not c arry out work on the engine y ourself. Fuel consumption, fuel, refuelling Fuel cons umption Fuel consum ption is determined under spec ific driv ing conditions – see pag e 215. S pecial equipment increases the weight of the vehicle. As a result, they can increase fuel consum ption and reduc e the specified ma ximum speed. Y ou may infringe env ironmenta l laws out of ignorance b y not disposing of materials prop erly. For the first few thousand miles / kilometres, friction between the engine and transmission components is higher. This increases fuel consum ption. Appropriate parts might not be recy cled. Fuel for pe trol engine s z Driving up steep grad ients, cornering , driving on poor roads and winter driving all increase fuel consum ption. N orma l commercia l high-quality fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 5% in acc orda nce with DIN EN 228 are suitable (for catalytic conv erter – see page 146, for octane numbers – see pages 212, 213). The quality thereof has consid erable effect on the performance, running and serv ice life of the engine. The additives mix ed with the fuel are extremely important. For this reason y ou m ust only refuel with highquality fuels c ontaining additives. Fuel consum ption increases drama tica lly in urban traffic and at w inter temperatures, especially on short trips when the engine operating temperature is not reached. Fuels with ethanol content greater than 5% do not comp ly with DIN EN 228 and m ust not be used unless the vehicle has been spec ifically dev eloped and ap prov ed for these fuels. C ontact w ith some of the m aterials involved may pose a health hazard. z We recommend that rep air and maintenance be entrusted to y our Vauxhall Authorised R epairer. Extreme driving conditions z Follow the hints giv en abov e to k eep consump tion to a minimum under such conditions. Fuel with too low an octane rating can cause pinking. N o lia bility will be acc epted for resulting damage. Driving an d Operation Petrol with a higher octane number can alway s b e used. The use of 91 octane fuel is not p ermitted in vehic les with the Z 22 YH 1 ) engine. The ignition timing a djusts autom atically to the grad e of fuel used (octane numb er) – see pages 212, 213. Use of petrol with an octane ra ting of 95 will ensure ec onomical driving. For vehicles with Z 20 LEH1) engine, use of 95 RON fuel red uces performance and torque. Fuel for diesel engine s Diesel engines must be operated only on commercially ava ila ble diesel fuel meeting the specific ations of DIN EN 590. Since January 2004, some oil companies have mixed their diesel fuel with up to 5% Bio fuel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl Esters) like RME (Rape-O il Methy l Ester). This is in accordance with the c urrent DIN EN 590 and does not harm the fuel injection system. The characteristics of a diesel fuel mixed up with 5% Bio fuel (FAME) do not differ from conventional diesel fuel a nd do not influence the vehicle’s drivea bility . Im portant : Diesel fuel m ix ed with 5% FAME according to DIN EN 590 m ust not be confused w ith 100% Bio Diesel, which is not to be used in Vauxhall engines. The flow a nd filterability of diesel fuel are tem perature-d epend ent. 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ge 21 2. Diesel fuels with improved low temperature prop erties are therefore available on the market during the winter m onths. Make sure that y ou fill the tank with winter fuel before the start of the cold weather season. Ad ditives can be used w ith diesel fuels with winter properties that are guaranteed b y the manufacturer and when using d iesel fuel filters tha t are heated depending on the outside tem perature. Diesel fuels must not be diluted with fuels that are intended for petrol engines. Fuel filler cap If replacing the fuel filler c ap, be sure to use a genuine fuel filler cap for your model to ensure full functionality. Diesel-engined vehicles hav e special fuel filler c aps. Re fue lling 145 9 Warn ing Care must be ta ken when hand ling fuel. Before refuelling, switch off the eng ine and where applicab le any auxiliary heating with combustion cha mbers (see sticker on fuel filler cap ). Switch off mobile phones. 9 Warn ing Fuel is inflamm able and ex plosive. Therefore, when handling fuel or when in the vicinity of fuel, avoid nak ed flam es and sparks. Do not smoke! This also applies where fuel c an be detected b y its characteristic smell. If y ou can smell fuel in your vehicle, have the cause of this rectified immediately by a workshop. 146 Drivin g and Operation Fuel filler neck at right rear sid e of vehicle. The tank fla p is locked together w ith the doors – see page 37. Catalytic converter, exhaust gases Catalytic converte r for petrol engines O pen the tank flap. Unsc rew the fuel filler ca p, remove and suspend from the tank flap . The fuel tank has a limiting system whic h prevents overfilling of the tank. 1. Fully insert the pump nozzle a nd switch it on. To close, place fuel filler ca p in p osition and turn, overcom ing the resistanc e until the ratchet on the cap engages a udib ly . Close ta nk flap. Wipe off any overflow ing fuel immediately. Irregular engine running a nd lack of power w hen the Electronic Stab ility Program me (ESP® Pl us 3) kick s in a re for operational reasons and can be ignored – see page 148. z If unb urned fuel enters the cataly tic conv erter, this may result in overheating and irreparable damage to the c atalytic conv erter. Correct filling depends to a large extent on proper operation of the fuel dispensing pump: 2. At automa tic sw itch off, the specified ta nk capac ity is rea ched a fter continued, measured filling. Leave the filler nozzle in place until the flow stops. possible. C ontinue emergency driving for a short period, m aintaining low speed and rev s. Leaded fuel will da mage the cata ly tic conv erter and parts of the electronic sy stem, rend ering them inoperative. High quality fuels other than those listed on pages 144, 212 (e.g. LR P1 )) could damag e the cataly tic conv erter. Damage to the ca talytic converter or the vehicle may result if the follow ing points are not observed: z In the event of faulty ignition, uneven running a fter cold starting , clear red uc tion in engine performa nce or other unusua l problems which may point to a fault in the ignition system, seek assistance of a workshop as soon as 1) LRP = L ead Rep la cem ent Petro l. You should therefore av oid unnecessarily long use of the starter when starting-off, running the tank d ry (an irregular fuel supply w ill lead to overhea ting) and starting the engine by pushing or towing. z If the control indicator Z for ex ha ust fla shes, ease back on the accelerator until the fla shing stop s a nd the control ind ic ator com es on. Seek the immediate assista nce of a work shop. C ontrol ind ic ator Z for ex ha ust – see page 147. Catalytic converter for dies el engine s Dama ge to the catalytic conv erter or the vehicle m ay result if the following points are not observed : z In the event of uneven running, a clear reduction in engine performance or other unusual problem s, seek the assista nce of a work shop as soon as possible. C ontinue emergency driving for a short period, m aintaining low speed and rev s. Driving an d Operation Irregular engine running and la ck of power when the Electronic Stability Programm e (ESP® Pl us 3) kicks in are for op erational reasons a nd can be ig nored – see pa ge 148. Control i nd icator Z for exhaust 147 C ont rol indic ator A for eng ine electronics Controlling exhaust emission Illum inates when the ignition is switched on and during the start attem pt. Goes off shortly after the eng ine sta rts running. Design measures – ma inly in the area of the injection sy stem and ignition sy stem, in combination with the ca talytic converter – have reduced the proportion of harmful sub stances in the ex ha ust gases, such as carbon m onoxid e (C O), hydrocarbons (CH) and nitrous ox id es (NO x), to a minim um. If it illum inates while the engine is running, it ind ic ates a fault in the emission control sy stem. The perm itted ex ha ust values may be exceed ed. Seek the immediate assista nce of a w ork shop. If it flashes while the engine is running, this indica tes a fault which could lead to damage to the catalytic converter. Continuing to drive without causing damage is possible if you ease up on the throttle until the flashing stops and the control indicator illuminates. S eek the immed iate assistance of a workshop. Illuminates for several seconds when the ignition is switched on. If it illuminates when the eng ine is running, there is a fault in engine or transmission electronics. The electronic sy stem switches to an emergency running p rogram me. Fuel consum ption m ay be increa sed and the driveability of the vehicle m ay be impaired. In some cases, faults can be rectified by switching off the engine and restarting it. If the control indicator illuminates again when the engine is running, seek the assistance of a workshop to rectify the cause of the fault. If it illuminates briefly, but does not rec ur, it is of no significance. If A illum ina tes, this may a lso indicate that water is present in the diesel fuel filter 3. At the sam e time, a text message 148 Drivin g and Operation appears in the service display – see page 88. Have the diesel fuel filter check ed for any resid ual water – see page 203. If it flashes after the ignition is switched on, there is a fault in the imm obiliser sy stem. The engine ca nnot be started – see page 30. Exhaust gases 9 Warning Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, which is colourless and od ourless and could be fatal if inhaled . If ex haust gases enter the interior of the vehicle, open the windows and seek the assistance of a workshop. Av oid driving with an open luggage com partment. Otherwise, ex haust gases could penetrate the interior. During the first drive, sm ok e m ay d evelop because of wax a nd oil eva pora ting on the exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the open for a while after the first drive and avoid inhaling the fum es. Diese l particle filter 3 The d iesel pa rticle filter system filters harmful soot pa rticles out of the ex ha ust gases. The system includ es a self-cleaning func tion at set intervals. The filter is cleaned by burning off the soot particles at high temperature. This proc ess takes place autom atic ally under set driving conditions and may take up to 25 minutes. Fuel consumption may be higher during this period. The em ission of smells and smoke thus occurring is normal. Und er certain driving conditions, e.g. short distances, the system cannot c lean itself autom atic ally. When the control indicator ! flashes, you should continue driving and as soon as the road and traffic conditions so perm it, increase y our speed to ov er 25 mph (40 km/h); cleaning of the diesel particle filter will then comm ence. Cleaning takes place most q uick ly at high speed a nd under load. The engine sp eed should not fa ll below 2000 rpm . The c ontrol indicator will go out as soon as cleaning is complete. We recommend that y ou do not turn off the ignition during cleaning. Maintenance Have all maintena nce work c arried out at the intervals spec ified. We recomm end that y ou entrust this work to your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who ha s p roper equipment and trained personnel available. Electronic testing sy stems fa cilitate rapid diagnosis and remed y of fa ults. This w ay you can be certain that all components of the vehic le’s electrical, injection and ignition system s operate correctly, that your vehicle has a low level of polluta nt em ission and tha t the cataly tic conv erter system will have a long serv ice life. Y ou are thereby making an im portant contribution towards keeping the air clean and c om pliance w ith emissions legislation. The Serv ic e work includes testing and adjusting the fuel injection system and the ignition sy stem. For this reason, ha ve all S ervice work carried out at the intervals spec ified in the S ervice Booklet. Drive Control Systems IDS+ = Interactive Driving System 3 The IDS + link s the sensors and control units of the Elec tronic S tability Programme (ES P®P lu s ), the Anti-lock Brak e S ystem (ABS) and the C ontinuous Damp ing C ontrol (CDC ). This g ives excellent driving dy na mics at the same time as high sa fety levels. Electronic Stability P rogramme (ESP® Plus ) 3 ESP® Pl us improves driving stability when nec essary in any driving situation regardless of the type of road surface or tyre grip. It also prevents the drive wheels from spinning, irrespective of roa d surface typ e and tyre g rip . The sy stem monitors v ehicle movem ents. As soon as the vehicle sta rts to swerv e (understeers / oversteers) engine output is reduc ed (the sound of the engine changes) and indiv id ual wheels are specifically brak ed. This consid erably improves the driving stability of the vehicle on snow and ice and on wet or slip pery road surfaces. Driving an d Operation ES P®P lu s is ready for operation as soon as the ig nition is switched on and control indicator v goes out. Control i nd icator v The ESP® Pl us control process is displa yed by the flashing of v. The v ehicle is now in a critical situation; ES P®P lu s allows you to keep control of the vehic le and reminds you to match your speed to the road conditions. Sw itching off 3 ESP® Pl us can b e deactivated if SPO RT mode 3 is engaged (LED in SPO RT button illuminates) for hig h performance driving: Hold the SPO RT button down for around 4 seconds, the control indicator v comes on. The service disp la y also show s ESPoff – see page 88. 9 Warn ing 9 Warning ESP® P lu s should not be d eactivated if one of the run-flat ty res 3 has no pressure. Do not let this special safety feature tempt y ou into tak ing risks when driving. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsib le driving style. 149 Illum inates for a few second s w hen the ignition is switc hed on. The sy stem is now ready for operation. Flashing during driving: This shows the sy stem has come into action. The engine output ma y be reduced (the sound of the engine changes) and the vehicle may be braked automatically to a sma ll degree. Illum inates whilst driving: The system is switched off or a fault is present. C ontinued driving is possible. The driving stability ca n however deteriorate depending on road surface conditions. Switch on ES P® P lu s again or have the c ause of the fault rectified . Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of fa ults. Pl us is reactiv ated by pressing the ESP® SPO RT button a gain or sw itching on the ignition. S PO RT mode – see p age 150. 150 Drivin g and Operation CDC (Continuous Dam ping Control) 3 cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the sy stem fa cilitates rapid rectifica tion of faults. The sy stem continually monitors w heel and vehic le mov ements and immediately modifies the damping of each shock absorber. Chassis calibration is optimally adap ted to the driving situation and road conditions. Sport mode 3 When SPO RT mode is engaged, the dam ping control is ada pted to a sp ortier driving style ("harder" chassis setting). Damping and steering become more direct and provide better contact with the road surface. The engine reacts more quickly to accelerator movements. CDC ad apts vehicle da mping to the current driving situation a nd roa d conditions. SPO RT mode – see right column. Cont rol indica tor IDS+ for Conti nuous Damp ing Cont rol To act ivat e SPORT mode is used to cha ng e damping 3 , steering 3, throttle application 3 and the shifting point for autom atic transmission 3 and Easytronic 3 whilst driving. With automatic transmission 3 a nd Easytronic 3, shifting times are reduced and gearshifting occurs at higher engine speeds (unless cruise control is on). Press the S PO RT button. The LED in the button illum inates. In v ehicles with Automatic transmission 3 or Easy tronic 3, the control indicator 1 also illumina tes. S PO RT mode cannot be sw itched on if the Winter programm e 3 is active (vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Easy tronic 3). For Winter programme – see pag e 139. To deact ivat e Briefly press the S PO RT button again or switch off the ignition. The LED in the button goes out. Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds when the driv er’s door is opened. If it illum inates whilst driving , this indica tes a fault in the system. The sy stem is not opera tional. The system switches to the harder chassis setting for reasons of safety . Hav e the Holding it p ressed switches off ESP® P lu s – see page 149. SPORT m ode remains eng aged. Driving an d Operation SPO RT mode is switched off when the Winter programme 3 is a ctiv ated (vehicles with automatic transmission 3 or Ea sy tronic 3 ). Winter programme – see page 139. Cont rol indica tor IDS+ for SPO RT mode For safety reasons the cruise control cannot b e ac tiv ated until the footbrake ha s b een op erated onc e. 151 C ont rol indic ator m Cruise control is operated with buttons m , g, and § on the turn signal stalk. Do not use the cruise control if it is not advisable to maintain a constant speed (e.g. in situations presenting a danger to yourself and other road users, in heavy traffic or on wind ing, slipp ery or greasy roads). The cruise control must only be switched on in Automatic mode with automa tic tra nsmission 3 and Ea sytronic 3 . When the cruise control is active, reaction tim es ma y b e increased due to the d ifferent position of the feet. Illuminates for approx. 10 seconds when the driv er’s door is opened. If it illum inates whilst driving , this indica tes a fault in the system. The system is not opera tional. Hav e the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of faults. When driving, control indicator m will illuminate as soon as the system is switched on. 9 Warning The driv er is also responsible for maintaining an app ropriate speed if the cruise control is on. Failure to follow instructions can c ause injuries or put lives at risk . Cruis e control 3 The c ruise c ontrol can store and maintain speeds of approx. 20 to 125 m ph (30 to 200 km/h). Deviations from the stored speeds may occur when driving uphill or downhill. To act ivat e Briefly press button m: the current speed is stored and maintained. The accelerator pedal can be released . 152 Drivin g and Operation Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the a ccelerator peda l is released, the previously stored speed is resum ed. Incr ease With cruise control activ e, hold down button m or briefly press it repea tedly: speed is increased continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h) without using the accelerator pedal. When button m is released the current speed is stored and m aintained. z if the clutch p edal is depressed or z if the selector lever of automatic transm ission 3 or Easy tronic 3 is in N. Resumi ng the stored speed Briefly press button g at a speed ab ov e 20 mp h (30 km/h): the speed selected before the cruise control was switched off is resum ed. The value of the stored speed is deleted when the ig nition is turned off. Parking dis tance sensors 3 Reduce With cruise control activ e, hold down button g or briefly press it repeatedly: speed is reduced continuously or in steps of 1.2 mph (2 km/h). To act ivat e When button g is released the current speed is stored and m aintained. To deacti vate Briefly press button § : C ruise control is switched off, control indicator m goes out and the vehicle slow ly decelerates. To continue driving, d epress the accelerator pedal in the usual manner. For reasons of safety, cruise control deactivates under certain driving conditions. For exa mple: z if the vehic le’s speed drops below approx. 20 mph (30 km/h) or z if the brake pedal is depressed or The p arking distance sensors make reverse parking easier by measuring the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle at the front and the rear, and emitting an acoustic signal in the p assenger compartment. The sy stem records the distance using four sensors in the front and rear bumpers. If the ignition is on, the front and rear park ing distance sensors automatically come on when reverse gea r is selected. Driving an d Operation The p arking dista nce sensors ca n also be enab led m anually at a speed of less than 15 mph (25 k m/h) using the r button on the instrum ent panel. Control i nd icator r If the vehicle approaches a n ob stacle at the front or the rear, a series of acoustic signa ls is hea rd in the v ehicle interior. The interval between the signals becomes shorter as the obstacle becomes closer. The signal is continuous if the distance is less than 30 cm . Und er certain circum stances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as w ell as external noise sourc es may cause the system to fail to detect ob stacles. For this reason, care must be ta ken when reversing even if the park ing distance sensors are operational. This is of p artic ular im porta nce when in the vicinity of ped estria ns. To deacti vate To sw itch the system off, press r button, and LED in button will g o off. The sy stem a utomatica lly switches itself off when the vehicle is being driven forwards with a speed above approx. 15 mph (25 k m/h). In trailer mode, the rear parking distance sensors are automatically switched off when the trailer cable is inserted into the socket. Fitti ng rear load racks 3 Rear load rack s, e.g . bicy cle rack s, fitted nea r the sensors could disrupt the system . Function stand by is indicated by an illuminated LED in the button r. 9 Warning 153 Automatic level control 3 If it illum ina tes: Fault in the sy stem. The sy stem is not op erational. Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of fa ults. If it flashes: The fault is d ue to sensors obstructed with snow or ice. The sensors must be undam aged a nd free of d irt, snow and ic e. Interference due to ex ternal sources of ultra sound (e.g . pneum atic drills, rota ry machines). Once the source of interference is removed, the sy stem will operate normally . Cara van / trai ler towing equi pment 3, carav an / trail er t owing The system a utomatica lly detects if a tow bar is properly fitted to the vehicle. Automatic level control makes it possib le to keep the heig ht of the vehicle constant when subjected to d ifferent loads in the rear (e. g. w hen towing a carava n or trailer). This significantly improves driving conditions. The vehicle is autom atically raised at the rear, increasing the spring travel and ground clearanc e. The autom atic lev el control sy stem is activa ted a fter approx. 2 miles (3 km), depending on the vehicle loading and the nature of the road surface. 154 Drivin g and Operation Headlight range adjustment – see page 107. Control i nd icator w Do not use full payload in the event of a malfunction. Have the c ause of the fault rectified immediately by a workshop . The Deflation Detection Sy stem does not replace manual checks with a suita ble gauge. Tyre pressure los s monitoring system DDS (Deflation Dete ction Sys te m) 3 Check tyre pressures at least every 14 da ys and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be c hecked when cold. Don’t forget to chec k the spare 3. The Deflation Detection S ystem continuously monitors the speed of all wheels whilst driving. If a ty re loses pressure, it b ecomes sma ller and rotates more quickly than the other wheels. If the system d etec ts a difference in speed, control indica tor w illuminates red . Stop imm ediately and chec k tyre p ressure. Mount the spare wheel if necessary – see pages 175, 176. The sy stem is op erational when the ignition is switched on and c an detect pressure loss from a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h). 9 Warn ing Tyre pressure – see pages 160, 220. System initi alisati on If control indicator w illuminates red whilst driving, there is a loss of pressure. Stop immed iately and check tyre pressures. A maxim um sp eed of 50 m ph (80 km /h) is permitted for run-flat tyres 3. O bserve the information on page 163. If control indicator w illum inates yellow whilst driving, this indicates a fault in the sy stem. Ha ve the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system facilitates rapid rectification of fa ults. The control indica tor flashes three times when the system is initialising . After c orrecting tyre pressure or changing a ty re / wheel, the system m ust be initialised: With the ignition switched on, press the DDS button for a pprox. 4 seconds. C ontrol indicator w flashes 3 times. The system is operational after driving a certain distance. O nly initialise the system if all tyres hav e the prescribed pressure. Driving an d Operation Tyre P re ssure Monitoring System 3 Di sp lay of current tyre p ressure The Ty re Pressure Monitoring System continually checks the pressure a nd speed of all four wheels w hilst driving. A pressure sensor is integrated in each wheel. Once a m inute, the pressure of each tyre is sent to a control unit, where it is compared. I f the system detects one or more pressure differences, a m essag e appears on the inform ation d isplay . The c urrent ty re pressures are indicated in the information display. For the sy stem to be opera tional, all wheels must be equipped with pressure sensors and all ty res must be filled to the prescribed pressure. The Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem autom atically detects if the vehicle is being driven with a load of up to 3 persons or a full loa d. O nce the ignition is switched on, the sy stem is operational and w ill continuously monitor the tyre pressures at speeds of approx. 20 m ph (30 km /h) and a bove. 9 Warning The Tyre Pressure Monitoring System does not replace m anua l chec ks with a suitab le gauge. Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery 14 day s and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Don’t forget to check the spare 3. Tyre pressure – see pa ges 160, 220. 155 For ex ample, the following messages can be displayed: Ü Board Computer BC 1 Navi active BC 2 Timer Tyre pressure Tyres ch eck rear lef t (value in ba r) OK Select menu item Tyres from the Board Comp ut er menu. The current pressure of each tyre is display ed. Wa rning messages A message is g iven on the information display to warn of inconsistent tyre pressures. In som e versions, the m essag e is display ed in abbrev iated form. A grap hic ind ic ating the left rear tyre is show n tog ether with the current tyre pressure: Slight pressure d eviation. Red uce speed. C heck p ressure a t next opportunity with app ropriate gauge and correc t if nec essary . O n the C olour Information Display this report will appear in yellow . 156 Drivin g and Operation Control i nd icator w System initi alisati on If control indicator w illum inates yellow whilst driving, this indicates a fault in the Ty re Pressure Monitoring System . Fitting a wheel without a pressure sensor (e.g. spare wheel 3) will also lead to a system fault. Have the ca use of the fault rectified by a work shop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the system fac ilitates ra pid rec tification of fa ults. The sy stem must be initialised after a wheel / tyre change: With the ignition sw itc hed on, press b utton DDS for ap prox . 4 seconds. C ontrol indicator w flashes 3 tim es. The sy stem is operational a fter driving a certain distance. Navi active Attention! F ro nt lef t tyre pressure loss (va lu e in bar) OK A graphic indicating the front left tyre is shown together with the current tyre pressure: S ignificant p ressure deviation or direc t pressure loss. S teer out of flow of traffic as quickly as p ossible w ithout enda ngering other vehicles. S top and check the ty res. Mount the spare wheel 3 if necessary – see pages 175, 176. A maximum speed of 50 mph (80 k m/h) is perm itted for run-flat tyres 3. O bserve the information on page 163. O n the Colour Information Display this rep ort w ill appea r in red. Acknowled gement of warning s – see page 101. O nly initialise the system if all tyres hav e the prescribed pressure (check when tyres are cold). General inform ation The Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem is not operational w hen the temporary spare wheel or spare wheel is used if this is not fitted with a pressure sensor, the control indicator w illuminates yellow. When displaying the tyre p ressure, – .– appears in the display . The tyre pressure is then monitored by the Deflation Detection S ystem – see page 154. Driving an d Operation If a complete set of wheels without Ty re Pressure Monitoring S ystem 3 sensors is mounted (e.g. four winter tyres), no error message will be displayed. The Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem is not opera tional. The tyre pressure of a set of wheels w ithout sensors is monitored by the Deflation Detection System – see page 154. Sensors for the Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem can b e fitted at a la ter date by a workshop upon request. When ma nually check ing tyre pressure w ith a p ressure gauge, screw the adapter onto the v alve. Tyre pressure – see pages 160, 220. Ev ery time you change a tyre, the v alve inserts a nd sealing rings from the Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem m ust be rep la ced by a workshop. To improve effectiveness, do not brake unnec essarily ha rd for the first 125 miles (200 km) after new brak e p ads ha ve been fitted. Brake pad wear must not ex ceed a specified lim it. Reg ular maintenance as detailed in the S ervice Booklet is therefore of the utmost im porta nce for traffic sa fety. Have worn brake pads replaced by a work shop. Pa ds which hav e b een tested a nd passed ensure optimum brak e perform ance. Brake pads worn to their minimum a re noisy. It is possible to continue driving . Have y our brak e pads replaced as soon as possible. Seek the assista nce of a workshop for replacing the brake pads. 157 Powerful app lic ation of the brake ped al automatically applies m aximum b ra king force amplification to achieve the shortest possible braking distance und er full brak ing (b rake assist). Maintain steady pressure on the b rake pedal for as long as full-on brak ing is to continue. When the brake pedal is released, the m aximum b ra ke force am plification is taken away . Adaptive brake light 3 During full-on brak ing, all three brake lights flash for the dura tion of ABS control. Footbrake The footbrake comprises two independ ent brak e circuits. The use of com mercially availab le liquid filled run-flat systems or rep air kits can impair the function of the system. Vauxhall-approved sy stems can be used. If a brak e circuit fails, the vehicle can still be brak ed using the other brake circuit. However, braking effect is achieved only when you dep ress the pedal firmly. You need to use considerab ly more force for this. The brak ing distance is ex tended. S eek the a ssistance of a workshop before continuing y our journey . Radio transmitters (e.g. radio headphones, walkie-talkies) opera ted in the area could cause interference in the Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem. To ensure the full peda l travel can be utilized, especially in case of a fault in one of the b ra ke circuits, there m ust be no ma ts in the vicinity of the pedals – see page 142. Brake system When the engine is not running, the assistance of the brake servo unit disappears once the brak e pedal ha s been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not red uced, but braking req uires significa ntly greater force. This is especially important to bear in mind w hen towing. The effectiveness of the brakes is a n important factor for traffic safety. Brake assist 158 Drivin g and Operation Check the brake lights b efore starting out on a journey. On v ehicles with check control 3 the brake lights are check ed automatically – see page 101. Handbrake Brake system control indicator R Alw ays apply handb ra ke firmly . On slopes apply the handb ra ke as firmly as possible. The control indicator illuminates when the ignition is switched on if the handbrake is app lied or if the b ra ke or clutch fluid level is too low. B ra ke fluid – see page 205. Just before sta rting a ny journey, check effectiveness of brake system at slow speed and w ithout obstructing m ov ing traffic, particularly if b ra kes are wet, e. g. after driv ing through an automatic car wash. The b ra ke fluid level should be check ed reg ularly . If the brake fluid level is too low and the hand brake is not ap plied, control indicator R on the instrument cluster illuminates – see pa ge 84. Hill Start Assis t 3 (HSA) The system helps pull away on inclines. After releasing the footbrake, if the handbrake is not applied the brak es are only released after 2 seconds. As soon as the a cceleration is sufficient to prevent rolling back, the brak e is released. The mechanical handbrake a ffects the rear wheel brakes. They automatically engag e when the lever is pulled. To relea se the handbrak e, lift handle slightly, press relea se button and lower ha ndle all the way down. To reduce the operating forces of the ha ndb ra ke, dep ress the footbrak e a t the sam e time. For vehicles with Easytronic 3, the control indicator flashes for a few second s w hen the ignition is turned off if the handbrake is not applied. 9 Warn ing If the control indicator comes on when the ha nd brake is off, stop, terminate y our journey immediately . Seek the assistance of a workshop. Driving an d Operation Anti-lock Brake System (ABS u) Control indicator u for ABS If there is a fault in ABS, the wheels may be subjec t to locking due to braking that is heavier tha n normal. The ad vantages of AB S are no longer opera tional. It starts to regulate the braking p ressure as soon as a w heel shows a tendency to lock. The v ehicle remains steera ble, even in the event of very heavy braking, for instance on bends or when sw erving to av oid an obstacle. Even in the ca se of full-on braking, the ABS makes it p ossible to drive round an obsta cle without releasing the brakes. 9 Warning For optimum b ra king, keep the brak e pedal fully depressed throughout the braking process, despite the fa ct that the pedal is pulsating. Do not red uce the pressure on the pedal. Do not let this special safety feature tempt y ou into tak ing risks when driving. Traffic safety can only be achieved by adopting a responsib le driving style. Fault 9 Warn ing The ABS continuously monitors the brake system a nd prevents the wheels from locking, independently of the ty pe of road surface and the tyre grip. ABS control is made app arent through a pulse in the brake peda l and the noise of the regulation proc ess. 159 Y ou can continue driving, provided y ou drive with care and anticipation. Hav e the cause of the fa ult rectified b y a workshop. Self-diagnosis integrated into the sy stem facilitates rapid rectification of faults. Illum inates for a few second s a fter the ignition is turned on. The sy stem is read y for operation when the control indicator goes out. If the control indicator does not go out after a few seconds, or if it illuminates whilst driving, there is a fa ult in the ABS. The brake system remains operational without ABS regulation. Se lf-check Each time the ignition is turned on and the engine started , after moving away from a speed of around 2 mph (3 k m/h) the system performs a self-check which may be audible. Wheels, tyres S ee page 220 for suitable tyres and restrictions. Factory-fitted ty res are matched to the chassis and offer optimum driving comfort and safety . Changing tyre / whe el type N ote the necessary modifications before switching to different ty res or wheels. If ty res of a different size than those fitted at the factory are used, the electronic speedometer may req uire reprogramm ing to ensure that the correct speed is displayed. 160 Drivin g and Operation 9 Warning Use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may lead to a ccidents and rend er the vehicle unroadworthy. Vehi cles w ith Tyr e Pressure Monit oring System 3 When using winter ty res or when switching to different tyre sizes, sensors for the Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem c an be fitted at a later da te by a workshop upon req uest. Otherw ise, the system would not indicate tyre pressure dev iations. Deflation Detection System 3 – see page 154. Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 – see page 155. Vehi cles w ith run-flat tyr es 3 When switching wheels, e.g. when switching to winter tyres, use run-flat tyres as there is no spare wheel or tyre repair k it in the v ehicle. Run-fla t tyres 3 – see page 163. Fitting ne w tyres Fit tyres in pairs or in sets, which is ev en better. Ensure that tyres on one a xle are z the same size z the same design z the same make z and with the same tread pattern. Fit directional tyres such tha t they roll in the direction of travel. The rolling direc tion is indica ted b y a sym bol (e.g . an arrow) on the sidewall. Ty res fitted op posing the rolling direction (e.g. when a ty re is changed) should be refitted as soon as possible. This is the only way to obtain full benefit from the design prop erties of the ty re. Tyre press ure C heck ty re pressure, including the sp are wheel, a t least every 14 da ys and prior to any long journey ; the ty res should b e checked when cold. Don’ t forget to chec k the spare 3. Run-flat ty res 3 must not be combined with conv entional tyres. Observ e legal requirements when disposing of tyres. Some b ra nd s of tyres have a b eaded ed ge for a lloy wheels to protect against damage. If wheel trim is used on steel wheels with beaded-edg e ty res, the following procedure must be followed: z Wheel trims and ty res that are a pproved by Va ux ha ll for the respectiv e v ehicle and comply with a ll of the relevant wheel and tyre combination requirements must be used. z If the wheel trims and ty res used are not Vauxhall-approved, the tyres must not have a b eaded edge. 9 Warning Use of unsuitab le tyres or wheel trim s could lead to sudden pressure loss and thereby a ccidents. Use the valve cap key to mak e unscrewing the valv e caps easier. The key is located on the inside of the tank flap. Driving an d Operation 161 Tyre condition, wheel condition Drive ov er edges slowly and at right angles if possible. Driving ov er sharp ed ges can cause concealed damag e to ty res and wheels that only becom es noticeable later. In vehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 there is an a dapter in the valve cap key . Sc rew ad apter to v alve before attaching tyre pressure gauge – see page 155. After having chec ked the tyre pressures, tig hten the va lv e ca ps using the v alve cap key . Tyre pressure – see pa ge 220. Incorrect infla tion pressures will imp air safety, v ehicle handling, comfort and fuel economy and will increase tyre wear. Do not reduce tyre pressure when the ty res are warm. Otherwise the pressure m ay drop below the permissible minim um when the ty res cool down. If the pressure is too low, this can result in considera ble ty re warm -up and internal damage, leading to trea d separation and even to tyre blow-out at high sp eeds. Hidden ty re d amage is not eliminated by adjusting tyre pressure. 9 Warning Incorrect ty re p ressure can lead to tyre rupture. Do not trap ty res when pa rk ing. C heck ty res regularly for d amage (penetrating foreign bodies, na ils, cuts, tears, bulges in side w alls). C heck the wheels for da mage. Seek the assista nce of a work shop in the event of damag e or unusual wear. 9 Warn ing Damage may lead to tyre blowout. 162 Drivin g and Operation z So as not to impair b ra ke cooling, use only wheel trims approved for use on your vehicle. Tread depth Check tread depth at reg ular intervals. Tyre de signations Meaning s: e.g. 195/65 R 15 91 H 195 = Tyre width, mm 65 = Cross-section ratio (ty re height to tyre width), % R = Belt ty pe: Radial RF = Type: RunFlat If there is more wear a t the front tha n the rea r, swap round front wheels and rear wheels. Correct tyre pressure. For vehicles w ith Deflation Detection System 3 or Ty re Pressure M onitoring S ystem 3, initialise the system – see pages 154, 156. Ty res should b e replaced for safety reasons if trea d depth drop s below 2-3 mm (4 m m for winter ty res). The leg ally permissible minimum trea d depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of the tread wea r ind icators (TWI1) ). A numb er of trea d wear indicators are spac ed a t equal interv als around the tyre within the tread. Their position is indica ted by m arking s on the tyre sidewall. Ge neral information z The danger of aq uap laning is greater if the ty res are worn. z Tyres age, even if they a re used only very little or not at all. A spare wheel which has not b een used for six years should be used w ith ca re. z Never fit used tyres the prev ious history and use of w hich y ou do not know. 1) TWI = T rea d W ear In dica to r. 15 = Wheel d ia meter, inches 91 = Load ind ex e.g . 91 is equivalent to 618 kg H = Speed cod e letter S peed code letters: Q S up to 100 mph (160 km/h) up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T H up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V W up to 150 mph (240 km/h) up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Driving an d Operation Run-flat tyres (RFT) 3 Run-fla t tyres have reinforced, selfsup porting sidewalls, w hich ensure that the tyres a lways have a certain amount of driveability, ev en when there is no p ressure. Run-fla t tyres are only permitted on vehic les with ES P®P lu s and Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem or Deflation Detection Sy stem. 9 Warning Check ty re pressures regularly even if runflat ty res are fitted. Check tyre pressures a t least ev ery 14 day s and prior to any long journey; the tyres should be checked when cold. Dep ending on tyre manufacturer, run-fla t tyres c an be identified from a marking on the ty re wa ll. E. g. RO F = RunonFlat for Goodyear or SSR = Self Supporting Runflat Tyre for Continental. Run-fla t tyres ma y only be used in combination with Vauxhall-app rov ed alloy wheels; this a lso app lies to winter tyres. Dr iving with a dama ged tyr e A loss in tyre pressure is ind icated by the Ty re Pressure Monitoring System 3 or the Deflation Detection S ystem 3. If a tyre has no pressure, continued driving is p ossible z at a sp eed of max. 50 mph (80 k m/h), z up to a distance of 50 miles (80 k m). 9 Warning When driving w ith a flat tyre, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 k m/h) or a distance of 50 miles (80 km). The vehicle will be more difficult to steer and handle and the b ra king dista nce will be longer. Adapt driving sty le and speed to the conditions at hand. 163 If the max im um perm issible speed for the winter ty res is less than that of the v ehicle, a notice indicating the m aximum permissible sp eed for the tyres must b e affixed within the driver’s field of v ision 1). If y ou use the spare wheel when it is fitted with a summer tyre, the vehicle’s driveability m ay be affected, especia lly on slippery road surfaces. Ob tain a replacem ent for the faulty ty re as soon as possible, and ha ve the wheel balanced and fitted to the v ehicle. Whe el trims 3 If the wheel trims and tyres used are not Vauxhall-approved, ma ke sure that the tyres do not have a beaded edg e – see page 160. Tyre chains 3 Do not use a tyre repa ir kit. Deflation Detection S ystem 3 – see page 154, Tyre Pressure Monitoring System 3 – see page 155. Winter tyres 3 For notes on fitting new ty res – see p age 159. See pag e 220 for restrictions. Winter tyres (M + S ty res) im prov e safety at temperatures below 7 °C a nd should therefore be fitted on all the w heels. The design of summer tyres means they ha ve lim ited qualities for winter driving. Restrictions and further information – see page 220. 1) Varies from coun try to coun try on a ccount of nationa l regu la tion s. 164 Drivin g and Operation Tyre c hains are only permitted on the drive wheels (front ax le). They must be fitted to the ty res sy mmetrica lly in order to achieve a concentric fit. Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 10 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock). Wheel trim on steel wheels could come into contact with parts of the chain and be dam aged. Rem ove the wheel trim – see page 176. Tyre chains m ay only be used at speed s up to 30 mph (50 k m/h) and, when travelling on roads that are free of snow, they ma y b e used for brief periods only sinc e they are sub ject to rapid wear on a hard road and may snap . Roof racks 3 V ersion with roof railing 3 9 Warning Disregard of these instructions m ay lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passengers must be informed accordingly. For safety reasons and to av oid dam age to the roof, we recomm end that y ou use the Vauxhall roof rack sy stem approved for your vehicle. Fasten the roof ra ck follow ing the instructions that accompa ny the system . Driv ing hints – see pa ge 142. Version without roof railing Temporar y spare w heel 3 Tyre chains m ust not be used on the tem porary spare wheel. If you need to use tyre chains a fter suffering a flat front ty re, fit the temporary spare on the rear axle and transfer one of the rear wheels to the front axle. To attach the roof ra ck mounting bolts in the holes shown in the d ia gram, see the enc losed instruction for the roof ra ck system. Towing equipment 3 9 Warn ing Disregard of these instruc tions may lead to injuries or endanger life. Vehicle passeng ers must be informed accordingly. For notes on the tem pora ry spare w heel – see page 176. Wheel chang ing – see page 176. Correct tyre pressure. Deflation Detection System 3 – see page 154, Tyre Pressure Monitoring Sy stem 3 – see page 155. Lift the covers from the fitting openings. Attac h roof rack at appropriate points, see enclosed roof luggage rack system instructions. Use only towing equipment that has been app rov ed for your v ehicle. We recommend entrusting the fitting of tow ing equipment at a later d ate to a workshop, whose personnel will be able to adv ise you on any possible towed load increa ses. The workshop will have instructions on how to insta ll the towing equipment and make any Driving an d Operation necessary chang es to the v ehicle that affect the cooling sy stem, heat shields or other equipment. 165 Disengage and fold d ow n the soc ket. Remove the sea ling plug from the hole for the coupling ball bar and stow it in the luggage compa rtm ent. 9 Warning C heck ing the tensioning of the coupl ing ba ll bar When op erating without a trailer, remove the c oupling ba ll bar. For installation dimensions of the tra iler towing equipm ent – see page 227. Stowage of coupling ball bar When inserting, ensure that the rotary ha ndle of the c oupling b all bar is facing up wards. Fitting the coupling ball bar z Red marking on turn knob points tow ards white mark ing on coupling b all bar. z Gap of approx . 6 millimetres between rotary knob and c oupling b all bar. The c oupling ba ll bar is stored in a b ag, stra pped into the left side of the stow age compartment in the luggage com partment floor beneath a cover with a rubber strap. Lift the carpeting to open the hatch. Raise, rotate a nd lift the ring. z Key is in lock at position 1. O therwise, the coupling ball bar must b e tensioned b efore it is inserted into the coupling housing: 166 Drivin g and Operation With other v ersions 3 a cover in the bumper m ust be rem oved before inserting the coupling ball ba r: pull out cover from below at recesses (at an angle, towards the rear) and store in the luggage compartment. Insert the tensioned c oupling ba ll bar into the coupling housing and push firmly up wards until the coupling b all ba r audibly engages in position. The turn knob snap s b ack into its hom e position resting against the coupling ball bar. z Unlock coup ling ball bar (key to position 1) – see Fig . 17222 T. z Pull turn knob out and then turn it cloc kwise as far as it will g o – see Fig. 17223 T. Inserting t he c oup ling ba ll bar 9 Warning Do not touch the turn knob when inserting the coupling b all bar – risk of injury. Lock coupling ball b ar (key to position 2 – see page 165, Fig. 17222 T). Remove key and p ress p rotective fla p into position. When the coup ling ball bar is locked the turn knob can no longer be p ulled out. Important C heck tha t the coupling ball bar is correctly insta lled: z Green marking on turn knob points tow ards white mark ing on coupling b all bar. z No gap between turn knob and c oupling ball bar. z Coupling ball ba r must b e sea ted firmly in coup ling housing. z Coupling ball ba r must b e locked and key must be removed. 9 Warn ing Tow ing a carav an / trailer is permitted only when a coup ling ball bar is fitted correctly. If the coupling ball b ar d oes not engage correctly, seek the a ssistance of a workshop. Eye for break-away stopping cable In the c ase of caravans / trailers with brake, attach the break -away stopping ca ble to the eye (arrow in Fig. 17225 T). Driving an d Operation Dismounting the coupling ball bar Caravan / trailer towing 1) Caravan and traile r loads The permissible caravan / trailer load s a re vehicle-dependent and eng ine-dependent maximum values which must not be exc eeded. The actual caravan / tra iler load is the difference between the actual g ross weight of the caravan / trailer a nd the actual coupling socket load w ith the caravan / trailer c oupled. When the caravan / trailer load is being checked , therefore, only the carav an / trailer wheels – and not the jock ey wheel – m ust be standing on the weighing app aratus. Unlock coupling ball b ar (key to position 1 – see pa ge 165, Fig . 17222 T). Pull out turn knob a nd turn clock wise as far as it will go. Pull coup ling ball bar down out of the coupling housing. For coupling ball bar storage – see page 165. Insert the sealing plug in the hole for the coupling ball ba r. Fold away the socket – see page 165, Fig. 17221 T. With other versions 3 Replace cover in bumper: insert guides of cov er into bumper, first from the front, then from the rea r, and eng age. Compress cov er in a slig htly bent p osition whilst doing this. Do not use steam-jet clea ners or other high-pressure cleaners to c lean the coupling ball ba r. The permissible caravan / trailer load s for your vehicle are given in the vehicle docum ents. Unless otherwise stated, they are v alid for gradients up to ma x. 12%. The permitted trailer load must only be used by drivers with adequate experience driving large or heavy trailers. The permitted c aravan / trailer load applies up to the specified incline and up to an altitude of 1000 m etres above sea-level. Since engine power decreases as altitude increases because of the air b ecoming thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability , the permitted towing w eight also decreases by 10% for ev ery 1000 metres of additiona l altitude. The towing weig ht does not ha ve to b e reduced when driving on road s w ith slight inclines (less than 8%, e.g. motorways). 1) Obs erve na tiona l reg ula tio ns. 167 The actual caravan / trailer loa d plus the actual Gross Vehic le Weight of the tow vehicle m ust not exceed the maxim um permitted towing weight. For example, if the permitted Gross Vehicle Weight is utilised, the caravan / tra iler load must only be used until the m aximum permitted towing weight is reached . The maximum permitted towing weight is shown on the identification plate – see pa ge 210. Coupling socket load The coupling socket load is the load exerted by the ca ra van / trailer on the coupling ball. It can be va ried by changing the weight distribution when loading the carav an / tra iler. The m aximum permissible coupling socket load (75 kg) is specified on the towing equipment identifica tion plate and in the vehicle d oc um ents. Always aim for the ma ximum load, especially in the case of hea vy ca ravans / trailers. The coupling socket loa d should never fall below 25 kg. When measuring the coupling socket load , ma ke sure that the drawbar of the loaded carav an / trailer is a t the same height as it will be when the carav an / trailer is coupled with the towing vehic le loa ded. Particularly important for carav ans / trailers with tandem ax le. Rear axle load during towing When the caravan / trailer is coupled and the tow ing vehicle fully loaded (including all occupa nts), the permissib le rear axle load (see identification plate or vehicle documents) ma y be ex ceeded by 90 kg 168 Drivin g and Operation and the Gross Vehicle Weight rating by 75 kg . I f the perm issible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of 60 mp h (100 km/h). applies. If national reg ulations specify a lower maximum speed for vehic les towing a carav an / tra iler, this must be observed . TS A is a func tion of the Electronic S tability Program me (ESP ® Pl us) – see pag e 148. Turn signal control indicators – see page 85. Driving characteristics , towing tips Parking distance sensors 3 are deactivated when towing. Handling is greatly influenced by the loading of the caravan / trailer. Load s should therefore b e sec ured so that they cannot slip and be placed in the centre of the caravan / trailer if p ossible, i.e. above the axle. Tyre pressure For trailers with less driving stability and carav ans w ith a perm itted Gross Vehicle Weight of m ore than 1300 kg a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) m ust not be ex ceeded ; the use of an anti-rolling device that uses the friction principle is recommended. In the case of caravans / trailers with brakes, atta ch break away stopping ca ble to eye. Increa se the ty re pressure on the tow ing vehic le to the value specified for a full load – see page 220. Chec k the p ressure of the spare wheel and ca ra van / trailer wheels. Trailer Stability As sis t 3 (TSA) TSA m onitors vehicle movements when towing a ca ravan or trailer. If the system detects lurching m ov ements, eng ine p ow er is reduced and the vehicle / trailer combination is selectively b ra ked until the lurching ceases. Before a tta ching the carava n / trailer, lubricate the ball of the ca ra van / trailer tow ing devic e. H ow ever, do not do so if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ba ll, is being used to damp snaking. Check caravan / trailer lighting b efore starting to drive. The fog tail lights on the vehicle are deactiv ated w hen towing a caravan or trailer. Tra ilers with LED turn signals must ha ve a fa cility that makes light monitoring possible in a sim ilar way to conv entiona l filam ent bulbs. Do not drive faster than 50 mp h (80 km/h) if possible, even in countries where higher speeds are permitted. Mak e sure that y ou ha ve enoug h room when cornering and avoid sudden ma noeuv res. If the caravan / trailer starts to sway , drive more slowly , do not attem pt to correct the steering and brake sha rp ly if necessary . If it is necessary to apply the brak es fully , depress the brak e pedal a s hard as possible. Remem ber that the braking d istance for vehicles towing carava ns / trailers w ith and without brake is always greater than the brak ing distance for vehicles not towing a carav an / tra iler. Driving an d Operation When driving downhill, the brakes a re under considerab ly m ore load when towing a cara van / trailer. For this reason, drive in the same gear as if driv ing uphill and drive at a similar speed. Autom atic transm ission 3 or Ea sy tronic 3 in Autom atic mode will automatically select the driving prog ra mme with the optimum engine brak ing effect. As necessary, gear 3, 2 or 1 c an also be manually selected. The cooling fan is electrically operated. Its cooling power is therefore independent of the engine speed. Since a considerable amount of heat is generated at high engine sp eed s a nd less at slower speeds, d o not shift down when climbing hills whilst the vehicle is still coping with the g ra dient in the higher gea r. Starting on inclines For vehicles with manual transmission, the most favourable engine speed when starting-off on an incline is between 2500 a nd 3000 rpm for petrol engines and between 2000 and 2200 rpm for diesel engines. Hold engine speed constant, engage clutch gradually (let slip), release ha ndb ra ke and open throttle. If possible, the engine speed should not drop d uring this procedure. For vehicles with autom atic tra nsmission 3 or Easytronic 3 it suffices to apply full throttle in Automatic mode. Before starting-off under ex treme conditions (high c om bination w eight, mountainous terrain with steep inc lines), switch off all unnecessary elec trica l loa ds (e.g. heated rear wind ow , air conditioning sy stem 3, heated front seats 3). 169 170 Self-help, Vehicle Care Self-help, Vehicle Care Diesel fuel system, bleeding . .... .... ..... . Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Starting .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Starting the engine with jump lead s 3 Towing ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Warning triangle ¨ 3, First aid kit (cushion) + 3 . .... .... ..... . Jac k £ 3 and vehic le tools.. .... .... ..... . Spa re wheel 3 . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Changing wheels . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Tyre repair kit 3 ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuses and the most important c ircuits they protect. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Halogen headlight system .... .... .... ..... . Xenon headlight system 3, Ad aptive Forward Lighting (AFL) system 3 .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Front fog lights 3 . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Rear lights ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Numb er plate light .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Courtesy lig ht .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle care. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Diesel fuel system, bleeding Nev er let the tank run dry ! If c ontrol indica tor Y illuminates, refuel as soon a s possible. Refuel immediately if it fla shes. 170 170 171 171 172 174 174 175 176 179 182 Restarting is p ossible a fter running the tank dry. Ex pect d elayed starting . Turn ov er the ignition three times for 15 seconds at a time. Then start the engine for a maximum of 40 sec onds. If the eng ine fails to start, repeat this process after no less than 5 sec onds. I f the eng ine still fails to start, seek the assistance of a workshop. Bonnet There is a safety catch on the undersid e of the bonnet: lift this upwa rd s a nd open the bonnet. Dirt on snow on the bonnet can slide onto the windsc reen when opened and block the air intake. 184 187 188 191 192 192 193 194 195 Air intake – see pag e 130. To op en the bonnet, pull the release lever loca ted on the driver’ s side below the instrument panel. The bonnet will then be unlocked and w ill op en partially. Return relea se lev er to its origina l position. Self-help, V ehicle Care 171 Vehicle w ith the O pen&S ta rt system 3 must not b e started by pushing or towing if the battery is d ischarged, since the steering colum n lock cannot be relea sed. The vehicle can only b e started using jump leads, see following section. Starting the engine with jump leads 3 A v ehicle with a discha rg ed battery can be started using jump leads and the battery of another vehicle. To lock the bonnet in the open position, insert the rod lying across the radiator into the small slot on the b onnet underside. Press rod firm ly into its holder before closing. Low er the b onnet and allow it to drop into its catch. Check that the bonnet is locked in p osition by pulling at its front edge. If it is not enga ged, repeat the proc edure. Starting Do not s tart w ith quick charge r This p revents da mage to electronic components. Do not s tart by pushing or towing Because your vehic le is fitted with a cataly tic conv erter, it must not be started by pushing or towing – see p age 146. Attempts to sta rt the vehicle should be made at interva ls of one minute and should not last longer than 15 sec onds 9 Warning Be ex tremely careful when starting with jump leads. Any d eviation from the following instructions can lead to injuries or dam age caused by battery ex plosion or dam age to the electrical systems of both vehicles. z Never expose the battery to naked fla mes or sparks. z A disc ha rg ed b attery c an freez e at temperatures of 0 °C. Defrost the frozen battery in a warm room before connecting jum p leads. z Do not allow battery fluid to come into contac t with ey es, skin, fabrics or painted surfaces. The fluid contains sulphuric acid w hich ca n cause injuries and dama ge in the ev ent of direc t contac t. z Wear eye protection and protec tiv e clothing when handling a battery. z Use auxiliary battery with sam e v olta ge (12 volts). Its capacity (Ah) m ust not be considera bly less than that of the discharged ba ttery. Voltage and capacity information can be found on the batteries. 172 Self-help, Vehicle Care z Use jump leads with insulated terminals and a cross section of a t least 16 mm2 (25 mm2 for diesel engines). z Do not d isconnect the disc ha rg ed battery from the vehicle. z Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers. z Do not lean over the battery during jump starting. z Do not allow the terminals of one lead to touch those of the other lead. z The vehicles m ust not com e into conta ct with each other during the jump starting process. z Ap ply handbrake. Ma nual transmission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, autom atic transmission 3 in P. 1. C onnec t one end of the first jump lead to the positive terminal 1 of the battery providing the jum p start (identified b y "+ " sign on battery case or terminal). 2. C onnec t the other end of this lead to the positiv e terminal 2 of the discharged battery ("+" sig n). 3. C onnec t the first end of the other jum p lead to the negative terminal 3 of the battery providing the sta rt (" –" sign). z In order to a void ex cess voltage in the electric al sy stem, b efore removing a lead, sw itc h on a n electrica l consumer (e.g. light, heated rear window) in the vehicle receiving the jump sta rt. z Reverse abov e seq uence exac tly when removing leads. Towing Towing your own ve hicle 4. C onnec t the other end of the second jump lead 4 to ground on the other vehicle, e.g. engine block or screw connection in the engine suspension. z Do not connect leads to negative term inal of discharged battery! z The connection p oint should be as far away from the discharged battery as possible. z Route the lead s so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compa rtm ent. z Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump . z After 5 minutes, start the other engine. Start attempts should b e m ade for no longer than 15 seconds a t an interval of 1 minute. z After the start, allow both engines to idle for 3 minutes with the leads connected . Connect the lea ds in the order shown in the illustration: For fixing of the front towing ey e, op en front right cover strip 3 : disengage strip at bottom, slide to side a nd remove. In another v ersion 3: O pen c ap covering front right tow ing eye socket: Release ca p at b ottom and rem ov e from b elow. The front towing eye is with the tool kit in a bag in a stowage compartment in the luggage compa rtm ent floor. To open the stowage compartment, lift carpet and then lift, turn and pull the tab – see p age 174, Fig. 17452 T. Self-help, V ehicle Care Driv e slowly. Do not driv e jerkily. Excessive tra ctiv e force can dam age the vehicle. 9 Warning For braking and steering, significa ntly higher forces a re required: b ra ke assistance and steering a ssistance are effective only with the engine running. 173 Towing se rvice Entrust your vehicle only to the towing service of your choice and obtain an estimate on towing costs before employing any tow ing service. In this way y ou avoid unnecessary c osts and possible insurance problems during claim processing. Towing another vehicle To prev ent the entry of exhaust fumes from the towing vehic le, switch on the air recirculation 3 and close the windows. Screw in the front towing eye anticlock wise as far as it will go until it stops in a horiz ontal position. Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the ey e. The front towing eye must only be used for towing and not recov ering a vehicle. Switch on ignition – see pag e 9, to release steering column lock and to permit opera tion of brak e lights, horn and windscreen wiper. Vehicles with the Open&S tart sy stem 3 must not be towed when the battery is discharged because the steering column lock ca nnot be released. Tow ing is only possible with the ignition switched on. Use jump leads to start the engine if necessary – see page 171. Manual transm ission or Easytronic 3 in neutral, a utomatic tra nsmission 3 in N. Vehicles with autom atic transm ission 3 should be tow ed facing forwards only and must not be towed faster than 50 m ph (80 km/h) or further tha n 60 miles (100 km ). If the transmission is defectiv e, or if the above speed or distance is to be exc eeded, the front axle must b e raised off the ground. Seek the assistance of a workshop. If the automatic clutch in v ehicles with Easytronic 3 is released manua lly in the event of interrup tion of power supp ly, tow ing is not permitted – see page 135. In this case, seek the immediate assistance of a workshop. After tow ing, unscrew the front towing ey e cloc kwise and refit the cover. To open the cover concealing the rear towing eye sock et at the rear rig ht of the vehicle: disengag e the cover at the bottom and p ull it off d ownwa rd s. The rear towing eye is with the tool k it in a bag in a stowage compartment in the luggage compa rtm ent floor. To open the stowage compartment, lift carpet and then lift, turn and pull the tab – see p age 174, Fig. 17452 T. 174 Self-help, Vehicle Care Warning triangle ¨ 3, First aid kit (cushion) + 3 Screw in the rear towing eye anticloc kwise as far as it will go until it stops in a horiz ontal position. The rigid lashing eye at the rear undernea th the vehicle must never b e used as a towing eye. Attach a tow rope 3 – or better still a tow rod 3 – to the ey e. The rear towing eye must only be used for towing and not recov ering a vehicle. Drive slowly . Do not drive jerkily . Ex cessive tractive forc e ca n damage the vehicle. After towing, unscrew the rear tow ing eye clockwise and refit the cover. Insert the warning triangle a nd the first-aid kit (cushion) in the reta ining straps of the tailg ate inner panelling. Jack £ 3 and vehicle tools The jack a nd the v ehicle tools are in a ba g, strapped into a stowa ge c om partment in the floor of the luggage compartment with a rubb er strap. To open the stowage compartment, lift the rear carpeting then raise, rotate and pull the ring. To close it, insert the lugs on the front rim of the lid into the recesses and lock into place. Self-help, V ehicle Care Spare wheel 3 175 z Lift the spa re wheel holder, insert the safety cab le. z Lift the spa re wheel holder and engag e in the catch. The open side of the ca tc h must p oint in the direction of travel. The spare wheel is kept beneath the vehic le. Instead of a sp are wheel the vehicle may be eq uipp ed w ith a tyre repair k it – see page 179. z Open tool kit storage compa rtm ent in lugga ge c om partment floor – see pa ge 174, Fig . 17452 T. z Fully release the hex agon bolt in the stowage compartm ent floor using the wheel bolt wrench. z Lift the spare wheel holder. z Unhook the catch and lower the spare wheel. z Deta ch the safety cable. z Lower holder all the w ay and remove spare wheel. z Place replaced w heel in spare wheel holder w ith outside of w heel fac ing upwards. Wheel changing – see page 176. z Turn the hexag on b olt in the stow age compartment floor with the wheel bolt wrench to raise the sp are w heel holder all the wa y up. z Close and lock stowa ge com partment cover. General information Depending on version, the spare w heel ma y be in the form of a temp orary sp are wheel 3 . Refer to the notes in this section and on p ages 164, 179, 220. O n vehicles with alloy wheels 3, the sp are wheel m ay have a steel rim. 176 Self-help, Vehicle Care If y ou use winter tyres 3, the spare wheel may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you use the spare wheel the vehicle’s ha nd ling may be altered. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the vehic le. The spare wheel may be fitted with a smaller ty re and a smaller rim tha n the other wheels on the v ehicle: using the sp are wheel m ay a lter the handling of the vehicle. Replace a defective tyre as soon as possible, bala nce the wheel and have it mounted on the vehicle. Notes on temporary spare whe el 3 z Using a temporary spa re wheel m ay cha nge the driving behav iour of the vehicle, particularly if using winter ty res 3. Replace defective tyre as quic kly as possible, balance wheel and fit to vehicle. z Fit only one temp orary sp are wheel. z Do not d riv e faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). and a rear wheel to the front. Check tyre pressure and adjust if necessary – see page 220. z Follow temporary spa re wheel instructions on pag es 164, 179 and 220. Notes on directional tyres 3 Ty re w ith a prescribed rotating direction can only achiev e their maxim um performance if they a re fitted in the prescribed rotating d irection. If a tyre or spare wheel is fitted that is rotating in the wrong direction due to a puncture, the following must be noted: z The handling of the vehicle may be different. Replace defective tyres a s soon as possible, have wheel ba la nced and fitted to the vehicle. z Do not drive faster than 50 m ph (80 k m/h). z Drive particularly carefully on wet and snow-c ov ered road surfac es. z Ta ke c urv es slowly . z For more information on tyres with a p rescribed rotating direction – see page 163. z Do not use for a lengthy period. Changing wheels z Replace tem pora ry spare wheel with full specification w heel without delay. There m ay be a tyre rep air kit instead of a spare wheel – see page 179. z Ty re chains are not permitted on the temporary spare wheel. If tyre c hains a re necessary after a front wheel puncture, fit the temporary sp are wheel to the rear To ensure your safety, make the following preparations and observe the following information when c hanging w heels: z Park the vehic le on a lev el, firm and nonskid surface. z Switch on hazard warning lig hts, ap ply ha nd brake, for manual transmission or Easytronic 3 - engage 1st or reverse gear, for autom atic transmission 3 selector lever in P. z Correctly set up the warning tria ngle 3. Wa rning triangle – see page 174. z Remov e spare wheel – see pa ge 175. z Before ra ising the vehicle, set the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. z Never change more tha n one wheel at once. z Block wheel that is diagonally opp osite to wheel being cha nged by placing wedg es or the lik e in front of and behind the wheel. z Use the ja ck 3 only to change w heels. z If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board (max . 1 cm thick ) should be placed under the jack 3. Using a thicker board could damage the jack 3 and the v ehicle. z No people or a nima ls m ay be in the vehicle when it is jack ed-up. z Never cra wl und er a ja cked-up vehicle. z Do not start or run the engine while the vehicle is on the jack. Self-help, V ehicle Care z Before screw ing in the wheel bolts when cha nging a w heel, you must apply a light coa ting of grease to the wheel bolts. Keep a standard commercial grease with you for this rea son. 2. Turn wheel b olts half a turn using the wheel bolt wrench 3 , pushing the wrench 3 on a s far a s p ossible. Alloy wheels 3: Diseng age wheel bolt caps with a screwdriver and rem ove. To protect the wheel, p la ce a soft cloth between the screwd riv er and the alloy wheel. 1. Pull off wheel trim with hook provided in toolkit 3. For vehicle tools – see pa ge 174. With wheel trims with visible wheel bolts 3 the trim ca n rem ain on the wheel. Retaining washers 3 on wheel b olts must not be removed . 177 3. The location of eac h ja cking point 3 is ind ic ated by a ma rk on the bottom edge of the vehicle. For v ehicles with side skirt trims 3 , the jack 3 may not b e used as it may damage the vehicle. 178 Self-help, Vehicle Care 5. Unscrew wheel bolts and wip e clean with a cloth. Then apply a light coating of grea se to the wheel b olts. Do not grea se the threa d of the b olts. Do not put the w heel bolts down in a location where they may becom e soiled. If the wheel bolts hav e retaining washers 3, they m ust not be remov ed. 6. Change the wheel. Notes on spare wheel – see p age 175. Notes on tem pora ry spare wheel – see page 176. 4. Before positioning the jack 3, set it to the necessary heig ht b y rotating the eye by hand. Position the jack 3 at the front or rear so that the jack claw spans the vertical b ase and grips in the recess in the v ertical base. Mak e sure it is properly positioned. The jack b ase must be on the ground directly b elow the jacking point in a manner that prevents it from slipping . Attach crank to eye of threaded rod and turn crank to raise v ehicle. If this is not the case, carefully lower the vehicle immediately and rep osition the ja ck. 7. Screw in wheel bolts and tighten slig htly, inserting the wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 8. Low er vehicle. 9. Tighten wheel bolts crosswise, putting on wheel bolt wrench 3 as far as possible. 10. Before refitting the wheel cov er clean the w heel a round the retaining clips. Valve symb ol 3 on ba ck of w heel cover must point tow ards valve on wheel. Align and refit w heel trim or wheel bolt caps 3. Alloy wheels 3: Align a nd refit wheel bolt caps 3 . 11. Stow the remov ed w heel, tools and warning triangle 3 – see pages 174, 175. 12. Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted w heel. Adjust as nec essary . Self-help, V ehicle Care 13. Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts on the new w heel checked on the vehicle using a torque wrenc h as soon as possible a nd, if necessary, corrected. Tightening torq ue – see p age 220. Tyre repair kit 3 14. Repla ce changed, defective tyre with a new one. Do not remove foreign bodies from the tyres. 15. Repla ce temporary spare wheel 3 with a full sp ecification wheel without delay. Damaged areas bigger than 4 m m and damage at the ty re rim cannot be repaired using the ty re repair kit. 16. Initia lise the Defla tion Detection System 3 or Ty re Pressure Monitoring System 3 – see pages 154, 155. 179 Minor d amage to the ty re tread or side wall, e.g. from foreign bodies, ca n be repaired using the tyre repair k it (does not a pply to run-flat tyres). 9 Warning Driving with low ty re pressures or depressurised ty res may lea d to invisible tyre dama ge. This dam age cannot b e rec tified using the tyre repair k it. Turn off your vehicle a nd seek the assistance of a workshop . The tyre repair kit is in a stowage compa rtm ent on the right in the lug gage compa rtm ent. To open the compa rtm ent, push locking tabs forwards and remove cover. For important information – see page 181. If you have a flat ty re: z Sw itch on haz ard warning lights, apply handbrake, automatic transmission 3 selector lever in park position P, with manual transmission or Easytronic 3 eng age 1st gear or reverse gear. z C orrectly set up the warning triangle 3. Warning tria ngle – see page 174. 1. Take the sealant bottle and bracket with air hose from the com partment. 180 Self-help, Vehicle Care 2. Detach air hose from bracket and screw onto sealant b ottle connection. 4. Unscrew d ust cap from defective tyre. 5. Sc rew ty re inflation hose to valve. 8. Swivel up the accessory soc ket at the right rear side of the luggage compartment and insert plug of tyre repair k it. To avoid discharging the b attery, we recommend running the engine. 3. Position sealant bottle on brack et as illustrated a bove. Make sure that the bottle does not fall. 6. Sc rew air hose onto compressor connection. 7. Sw iv el c ov er of electrical connection upwards from the left, see arrow in Fig. 17944 T, and d isconnect plug. Self-help, V ehicle Care 9. Press b utton < on the compressor. The tyre is filled with sea lant. 15. C olla pse wa rning triangle 3 and stow in luggag e com partment– see pa ge 174. 10. The compressor p ressure gauge briefly ind ica tes up to 6 ba r (87 psi) whilst the sealant bottle is emptying (approx. 30 seconds). Then the pressure starts to drop . 16. Attach the stick er containing the m aximum p ermitted sp eed that is affixed to the sealant bottle w ithin the driv er’s field of view. For sticker – see pag e 180, Fig. 17469 T. 11. All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre. Then the ty re is inflated. 17. C ontinue driving immediately so that sea lant is ev enly distributed in the ty re. After driving approx. 6 miles (10 km) but no more than 10 m inutes, stop and check ty re pressure. Screw compressor air hose directly onto tyre valv e and com pressor when doing this. 12. The prescribed tyre pressure – see page 220, should be ob ta ined within 10 m inutes. When the correct pressure is ob ta ined, switch off the com pressor by p ressing button < aga in. If the p rescribed tyre pressure is not achieved within 10 minutes, the tyre is too heavily damaged. Turn off your vehicle and seek the assistanc e of a workshop. As long as the ty re pressure is m ore than 1.3 bar (19 psi), it may be a djusted to the prescribed value. Repeat the procedure until there is no m ore loss of pressure. Release excess t yre p ressure using button ]. I f the tyre pressure has fallen below 1.3 bar (19 psi), the vehicle must not be used. Seek the assistance of a workshop. Do not run the compressor for more tha n 10 minutes, see " Important information" on pa ge 181. 13. Disconnect plug from a ccessory socket, place in p lug compartment and remov e tyre repair kit. Push catch on brack et to remove seala nt b ottle from brack et. Screw tyre inflating hose to free connection of sealant bottle. This prev ents sealant from escaping. Stow tyre repair k it in lugga ge compartment. 14. Rem ov e a ny ex cess sealant using a cloth. 18. S tow away tyre repair k it behind cover on right in side panelling in luggage com partment. To close, insert cover at rear and engage in panelling. 181 Important 9 Warn ing Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km /h). Do not use for a lengthy period. Steering and handling may be affected. The driving characteristics of the rep aired tyre is sev erely affec ted, therefore have this tyre rep la ced. If unusual noise is heard or the compressor becomes hot, turn compressor off for at least 30 minutes. The built-in safety valve opens at a pressure of 7 bar (102 psi). Protect c om pressor from m oisture and rain. The sea la nt can only be stored for approx . 4 years, after w hich tim e its sealing cap ability is no longer guaranteed. Pay attention to stora ge information on sealant b ottle. The sealant bottle ca n only be used once. Replace used sealant bottle. The compressor and sealant can be used from app rox . -30 °C. 182 Self-help, Vehicle Care Dispose of used tyre repa ir kits in accordance with the a pplicable laws. The a dapters supplied 3 can be used to pump up other items e.g. footballs, air mattresses, inflatable dinghies etc. When using the tyre repair kit, no consumers may be c onnec ted to the front accessory sock et. Electrical system 9 Warning Electronic ignition systems use a very high voltage. Do not touch the ignition system; danger to life. A blown fuse (see the following illustrations) c an be recognised by its melted wire. Do not install a new fuse until the cause of the fault has been remedied. Fuse s The vehicle has two fuseb ox es: one behind a cover on the left side of the luggag e compartment and one in the front left of the engine compartment. Different ty pes of fuse are used. We rec om mend that you keep a complete set of fuses in the vehicle. Store spare fuses in the fusebox in the lugg age compartment. Open the cov er – see p age 184. Before replacing a fuse, turn off the respective switch and the ignition. Fuse colour Brow nish yellow Brow n Red Blue Yellow Tra nsparent Green Fuse rating 5A 7.5 A 10 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 30 A Self-help, V ehicle Care 183 There is a fuse extractor in the lug gage compartment fusebox to facilitate replacement of fuses – see Fig. 17258 T for a n exa mple. Fuse colour Blue Transparent Pink Green Fuse rating 20 A 25 A 30 A 40 A Place the fuse extractor on the v arious typ es of fuse from the top or side, and withdraw fuse. O nly install fuses of the specified rating. each fuse has its rating w ritten on it, in add ition the fuses are colour coded. 184 Self-help, Vehicle Care Fuses and the most important circuits they protect Fuse box ve rsion A Fusebox version B Fusebox in luggage compartment The fusebox is on the left in the lug gage compartment behind a cover. To open the compartment, push locking tabs forwards and remove cover. Do not store any objects behind the cover. Dep ending on the equipment version, there are two different fuseboxes in the luggage compartment for differing electrical circuits. z Version A – see Fig. 18504 T z Version B – see Fig. 17958 T Spa re fuses, fuse extrac tor – see p age 182. Some functions can be protected by several fuses. Pry off relev ant cap to cha ng e the fuse. No. Ci rcuit 1 Front fog lights Rating 15 A 2 Rear sock et 3 Lug gage compartment soc ket 4 Reversing lights 15 A 15 A 5 Electric windows, rear 6 Air conditioning system 30 A 10 A 7 Electric windows, front 8 Heated exterior mirrors 30 A 7.5 A 7.5 A S om e functions are protected by several fuses. No. C ircuit R ating 1 Electric wind ows, front 2 – 25 A – 3 I nstruments 7.5 A Self-help, V ehicle Care No. C ircuit Ra ting 4 Heating, air c onditioning system, Electronic Climate C ontrol (EC C) 5 Airbags 5A 6 – 7 – – – 8 – 9 – No. Circ uit Rati ng 26 Electrically retra ctable ex terior mirrors 7. 5 A 27 Ultrasonic sensor, Va ux ha ll alarm system 5A – 15 A – – 28 – 29 Cigarette lighter, front socket 30 Rea r socket 10 – 11 Heated rear wind ow – 25 A 31 – 32 – – – 12 Rear window wip er 13 Parking d istance sensors 15 A 5A 33 Op en&Start system 34 – 15 A – 14 Heating, air c onditioning system 7.5 35 Rea r socket 36 Towing equipm ent 15 A 20 A 15 – 16 S eat occupancy recognition, O pen&Start system 17 Rain sensor, air quality sensor, Tyre Pressure Monitoring System , interior mirror 18 Instrum ents, switc hes – 5A 37 – 38 Central loc king sy stem, terminal 30 39 Seat heater (left) – 25 A 40 Seat heater (right) 41 – 15 A – 19 – 20 C DC – 10 A 42 – 43 – – – 44 – – 21 Heated ex terior mirrors 22 – 7.5 A – 23 Electric windows, rear 24 Diagnostics p lug 25 A 7.5 A 25 – – 7.5 A 5A 5A 185 Fusebox in e ngine compartm ent 15 A 15 A The fusebox is at the front left of the engine compa rtm ent. 9 Warn ing Turn off engine before opening engine compartment fusebox ; risk of injury – see page 201. To open the cover, release the catch by inserting a screwdriver into the opening as far as it will g o a nd swivelling it to the side. O pen the cover up wards and rem ove. Depending on the equip ment variant there are two different fuse assignments in the eng ine compartm ent fusebox that cover different power c ircuits: z If fusebox va ria nt A is in the lugg age compartment – see Fig . 18504 T, page 184, the version A fuse assignments app ly , see nex t page. 186 Self-help, Vehicle Care z If fuseb ox variant B is in the luggag e com partment – see Fig. 17958 T, page 184, the version B fuse assignments apply – see following page. Spa re fuses, fuse extrac tor – see p age 182. Ve rsion A fuse assignments Some functions are protected by sev eral fuses. No. Circuit Rat ing Rating 18 Starter 19 – 25 A – 1 ABS 2 ABS 20 A 30 A 20 Horn 21 Engine electronics 15 A 20 A 3 Interior fan, Electronic Clim ate C ontrol (ECC) 40 A 4 Interior fan, heating , air conditioning system 40 A 7.5 A 5A 5 Cooling fan 1 (dep ending on engine) 30 A 40 A 22 Engine electronics 23 Head lig ht range adjustment 24 Fuel pump 15 A 6 Cooling fan 2 (dep ending on engine) 20 30 40 20 25 – 26 Engine electronics – 10 A 27 Heating, air conditioning sy stem, air q ua lity sensor 7.5 A 28 – 29 Electro-hydra ulic power-assisted steering 30 Engine electronics – 5A 31 Rear w indow wiper 32 Brake lig ht switch 15 A 5A 33 Head lig ht range adjustment, light sw itc h, clutch switch, instrum ent, driver’s door m od ule 5A 34 Control unit, steering colum n module 7.5 A 35 Infotainment sy stem 36 Cigarette lighter, front socket 20 A 15 A No. Ci rcuit 7 Central locking system A A A A 8 Wind screen wash system, tailgate 10 A 9 Heated rear window, heated exterior m irror 30 A 10 Diagnostics plug 11 Instruments 7.5 A 7.5 A 12 Mobile telephone, digital radio, Twin Audio, display 7.5 13 Courtesy lig ht 14 Wind screen wiper 5A 30 A 15 Wind screen wiper 16 Horn, ABS, brake light switch, air conditioning system 30 A 5A 17 Diesel particle filter or air conditioning system 25 A 20 A 10 A Self-help, V ehicle Care Ve rsion B fuse as signments No. Ci rcuit Rating 40 A 25 Tra nsmission electronic s 26 Engine electronics 15 A 10 A 5 Cooling fan 1 (dep ending on engine) 30 A 40 A 27 Electro-hydra ulic power-assisted steering 5A 6 Cooling fan 2 (dep ending on engine) 28 Tra nsmission electronic s 29 Tra nsmission electronic s 5A 7.5 A 7 Wind screen wash system 20 30 40 10 8 Horn 9 Headlight wash sy stem 15 A 25 A 10 Em ergency unlocking of central lock ing sy stem 20 A 11 – 12 – – – 13 Front fog lights 14 Wind screen wiper 15 A 30 A A A A A 17 Diesel particle filter heating 25 A 18 Starter 25 A 19 Transm ission elec tronics 20 Air conditioning system 30 A 10 A Rat ing 21 Engine electronics 22 Engine electronics 20 A 7.5 A 1 ABS 2 ABS 20 A 30 A 23 Adaptive Forward Lighting, 10 A head lig ht ra ng e ad justment 3 I nterior fa n, Electronic C limate Control (ECC ) 40 A 24 Fuel pump No. C ircuit Rat ing 4 Interior fan, heating , air conditioning system 15 Wind screen wiper 30 A 16 Control module electronics, 5 A O pen&Start system, ABS, brake light switch Some functions are protected by severa l fuses. No. Circuit 187 15 A 30 Engine electronics 10 A 31 Ad aptive Forward Lig hting, 10 A headlight range ad justment 32 Brake sy stem, air 5A conditioning system, clutch switch 33 Ad aptive Forward Lig hting, 5 A headlight range adjustment, light sw itc h 34 Control unit 7.5 A steering column module 35 Infotainment sy stem 20 A 36 Mobile telephone, digital ra dio, Twin Audio, display 7.5 A Bulb replacement Before replac ing a bulb, switch ignition off and switch relevant switch off. O nly hold new bulb at base! Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hands, otherwise fingerprints on the glass eva pora te. Residue builds up on the reflector eventually resulting in a dull reflector. Inadv ertently stained bulbs may be cleaned with a clea n lint-free cloth, using alcohol or white spirit. 188 Self-help, Vehicle Care Replacem ent bulb m ust be in accordance with d ata on base of defective bulb. Do not exceed wa tta ge g iv en on bulb b ase. Halogen headlight system 1. Replace bulb through opening in the front wheel arch: turn relevant wheel to gain access, relea se catch and remove cover – see pa ge 187. 2. Remov e headlight protective cover. The b ulbs of the front exterior lights are rep la ced through openings in the front wheel arch: turn relevant wheels to gain access, release catch and remove cover. Headlight aiming We recommend that head light a im ing be carried out by a workshop, who will have special equipment. When aiming y our headlights, the m anual head lig ht range adjustment 3 must be set to 0. Head lig hts with sep arate systems for ma in beam 1 (inner bulbs) a nd dipped beam 2 (outer b ulbs). Dippe d beam 3. Rotate left bulb carrier and disengage. Self-help, V ehicle Care 4. Remove the bulb hold er with bulb from the reflector. Main be am 1. O pen and support the bonnet. 5. Detach b ulb from bulb mounting. 6. Insert new bulb into bulb mounting, without touching the gla ss. 7. Insert new bulb so that the two lugs on the bulb m ounting eng age in the recesses in the reflector. 8. Rotate b ulb carrier to right as far as it will go. 9. Place headlight protective cover in position and close. 10. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and enga ge. 189 2. Replace bulbs from engine compa rtm ent side. 5. Disengage sp ring clip from retainer by pressing forwa rd s a nd then swing downward. 6. Remove bulb from reflector housing. To rep lace the bulb on the rig ht-hand side, remove the air hose from the air filter. 7. When fitting a new bulb, eng age the lugs in the rec esses on the reflector without touching the g lass. To rep lace the bulb on the left-ha nd side, remove the plug from the fusebox. 8. Engag e sp ring wire clip, p lug connector onto bulb . 3. Remove headlight protectiv e c ov er. 4. Deta ch plug connector from bulb. 9. Place headlight protec tiv e cov er in position and close. After bulb replacement on the right-hand side, reattach air hose to air filter and engage. After bulb replacement on the left-hand side, reconnect p lug to fusebox and engage. 190 Self-help, Vehicle Care After bulb replacem ent on the right-hand side, rea tta ch air hose to air filter and engage. Parking lights 1. Open and sup port the bonnet. 2. Replace bulbs from engine com partment side. After bulb replac ement on the left-hand side, reconnect plug to fusebox and engage. To replace the b ulb on the right-ha nd side, remove the air hose from the air filter. Front turn signal lights 1. Open and support the bonnet. To replace the b ulb on the left-hand side, remove the plug from the fusebox. 2. Replac e bulb through opening in the front wheel arch: turn relevant w heel to gain access, release catch and remove cover – see page 187. 4. Remove parking light bulb holder from reflector. 3. Remove m ain beam headlight protec tiv e cov er. 3. Remov e protective cover. 5. Remove bulb from socket. 6. Insert new bulb, without touc hing the glass. 7. Insert hold er in reflector. Place hea dlight protectiv e ca p in position and c lose. Self-help, V ehicle Care 191 7. Insert light holder in reflector, rotate clockwise and enga ge in p osition. 8. Position cover on opening in wheel arch and engage. Xenon headlight system 3, Adaptive Forward Lighting (AFL) system 3 Xenon headlight system in conjunction with adjustable lighting dep ending on steering deflection. 9 Warning 4. Rotate bulb holder to left and diseng age. 5. Push bulb into socket slig htly, rotate left and remov e. Xenon head lig hts opera te at very hig h voltages. Do not touch, risk of fatal injury. Hav e d ip ped beam , main b eam, sid e lights and parking lights replac ed b y a workshop only . 3. Rotate bulb holder to left and disengage. Front turn s ignal lights 1. O pen and support the bonnet. 2. Replace bulbs from engine compa rtm ent side. To rep lace the bulb on the rig ht-hand side, remove the air hose from the air filter. To rep lace the bulb on the left-ha nd side, remove the plug from the fusebox. 4. Push bulb into socket slightly , rotate left and rem ov e. 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 5. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass. 192 Self-help, Vehicle Care 6. Insert lig ht holder in reflector, rota te cloc kwise and engage in position. After bulb rep la cement on the right-hand side, reattach a ir hose to air filter and engage. To c hange the bulbs on the left sid e, take off the luggag e comp artment brack et and cover a nd open the side cover: Push locking tabs forwards and remov e cover. After bulb replacement on the left-ha nd side, reconnect plug to fusebox and engage. Front fog lights 3 Hav e lights replaced b y a w ork shop. Rear lights 4. Pull b ulb housing backwa rds. 2. C om press plug connector and pull from bulb ca rrier. 3. Unscrew two plastic securing nuts from the inside by hand. 1. To cha nge the bulb s on the right side, op en the side cover: Push locking tab s forwards and remove cover. Remove foam c ontainer and tyre repair kit 3. 5. Diseng age both lock ing tabs from the bulb carrier and remov e bulb carrier. Self-help, V ehicle Care 193 7. C heck that rear lights are operating correctly after bulb replacement: – – – Switch on ignition Op erate brake Switch on park ing lights Number plate light Bulbs in bulb holder: 1 2 3 4 = = = = 2. Remov e bulb housing downw ard, taking care not to p ull on the cable. Ta il light / b ra ke light Turn signal light Fog tail lig ht Reversing light 3. Lift flap a nd disc onnec t plug from bulb socket. 6. Remove bulb from socket. Insert new bulb without touching the glass. Engage bulb holder in bulb housing. Engag e plug c onnec tor. Insert bulb housing in v ehicle body and tighten atta chm ent nuts by hand. On the right-hand side, insert foa m container and tyre repair k it 3. Engage cover fla p in lugga ge c om partment. Engage lugga ge c om partment b ra cket. 1. Insert sc rewdriver v ertically in bulb insert as shown in illustration. Press to the sid e and release spring. 4. Rotate bulb socket anticlockwise and disengage. 5. Remov e bulb from socket. 194 Self-help, Vehicle Care 6. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 7. Insert bulb hold er in bulb housing and turn to the rig ht. 8. Connect plug to b ulb socket. 9. Insert and engag e bulb housing. Courtesy lights and reading lights above second and third rows of seats Have lights replaced by a workshop . Glove compartment lighting, luggage compartment lighting, footwell lighting 3 Courtesy light Front courte sy light, reading lights 3 To ensure that no power is supplied to the lights, close the d oors before rem oving . 2. Press b ulb slightly towards spring clip and rem ov e. 3. Insert new b ulb, without touching the glass. 4. Insert light in opening and engage in position. Close doors or hold down contact switch before removing lights so that they are not liv e. 1. Prise the lig ht out with a screwdriver. 1. Disenga ge lens b y hand at loca tion shown in illustration, press it downward slightly and remove at a downward ang le. 2. Remove bulb from socket. 3. Insert new bulb, without touching the glass. 4. Mount lens and engage in position. Instrument illumination, Information display illumination 3 Hav e lights rep la ced by a workshop. Self-help, V ehicle Care Vehicle care When caring for your vehicle, observe all nationa l environmental regulations, particularly when washing it. Regula r, thorough care helps to imp rov e the a ppearance of your vehicle and maintain its v alue ov er the y ears. I t is also a prerequisite for warranty claim s for any paint or corrosion dam age. The following pages conta in tips for vehicle ca re which, if used properly, w ill help comb at the unavoidable damag ing effects of the env ironment. Vehicle care aids 3 Vehicle wash: z Wash brush, z C ar Shampoo, z C ar Sponges, z Insect Removal Sponge, z Wheel Cleaners, z Engine Cleaners, z Glass Clea ners, z C ham ois Lea ther. Vehicle care: z Paintwork Cleaner, z Paintwork Polish, z C ream Polish, z Metallic Paintw ork Wax, z Hard wax, z Touch-up stick, z Touch-U p / Aerosol Paint, z Wheel Preserver, z Insect Remover, z Alloy Wheel Cleaner, z Alloy Wheel Preserver, z Rust Preventa tiv e, z Vauxhall De-icer Spray , z Window Cleaning Spray , z Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent, z Silicone Oil for Rubber Seals, z C leaner. 195 Washing The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to env ironmental influenc es, e.g. c ontinuous changes in w eather conditions, industrial waste gases and dust or thawing salts, so wash a nd wax your vehicle regularly . When using autom atic car wa shes, select a programm e w hich includes w axing. Bird d ropp ings, dead insec ts, resin, pollen and the like should be cleaned off imm ediately, a s they contain aggressive constituents which can ca use paint dam age. If using an automatic ca r wash, comply with the pertinent instructions of the car wash manufacturer. The wind screen wiper and rear window wip er must be sw itc hed off – see pages 11, 12. Rem ov e antenna 3 and roof rack 3. S tand on the door sill to reach them more easily . If y ou wash your vehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wings are also thoroughly rinsed out. C lean edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the a reas they cover. Thoroughly rinse off a nd leather-off the vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use sepa ra te leathers for paint and window surfac es: rem nants of wax on the windows will im pair vision. O bserve national regulations. 196 Self-help, Vehicle Care Waxing Wax y our vehicle regularly, in particula r after it ha s b een washed using shampoo and at the latest when water no longer forms bead s on the paintwork, otherwise the p aintwork will dry out. Also wax edges and folds on opened doors and flaps as well as the areas they cover. Polishing Polishing is necessary only if the paint has become dull or if solid deposits have become attached to it. Paintwork polish w ith silicone forms a protective film, making wa xing unnecessary. Plastic b od y parts such as the roof module of the panoramic roof must not be treated with preservation and polishing ag ents. Use M etallic Paintwork Wax on v ehicles with a m etallic-effect paint finish. Panoramic roof 3 Never clean w ith solvents or abrasive agents, fuels, agg ressive media (e.g. paint cleaner, a cetone-containing solutions etc.), acidic or highly alk aline media or abrasive pads. No stickers m ay b e ap plied to the panoramic roof, and do not use plastic protector sleeves. Wheels Whe els and tyre s Wheels are painted a nd can be treated with the sam e agents as the body . For a lloy wheels we recommend use of Alloy Wheel Preserver. Interior and upholste ry Paintwork dam age The instrument panel should only b e cleaned using a soft damp cloth. Use a p H-neutral wheel clea ning a gent to clean the wheels. Immediately rectify minor p aintwork damage suc h as stone chips, scratches, etc. using a touch-up stic k or Touch-Up / Aerosol Paint before rust ha s a chance to form. If rust has already formed, hav e the cause rectified by a workshop. Note also the surfaces and edges facing the road on whic h rust may develop for a long period of tim e w ithout being noticed. Exte rior lights Head lig ht and other protective light covers are m ade of plastic. If they require additiona l cleaning after the vehicle has been washed, clean them with Car Shampoo. Do not use a ny abrasive or caustic a gents, do not use an ice scraper, and do not clea n them dry . Plastic and rubber parts For add itional cleaning of plastic and rubb er parts use C leaner. Do not use any other agent, and in particular do not use solvents or petrol. Do not use high-pressure jet clea ners on plastic and rubber p arts. Do not use high-pressure jet c leaners on wheels and tyres. C lean the vehicle interior, including the instrument panel fac ia , using interior cleaner. C lean fabric upholstery w ith a vacuum cleaner and brush. To remove stains, use cleaner tha t is suitable for both fabrics and vinyl. Do not use cleaning agents suc h as acetone, tetrachloride, paint thinner, paint remover, nail varnish remover, washing powder or bleach. Petrol is also unsuitable. O pen v elcro fasteners on clothing could dam age seat upholstery . Ma ke sure that velcro fasteners are closed. Seat belts Alway s k eep seat b elts clean a nd dry. C lean only with lukewarm w ater or Cleaner. Windows When cleaning the hea ted rear window, ma ke sure that the heating element on the insid e of the window is not damaged. Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather in conjunction with Window Cleaner a nd Insect R emover. Vauxhall Wind screen Wash Solvent is suita ble for de-icing windows. Self-help, V ehicle Care For mechanical removal of ice, use a commercially a vailable sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the sc ra per firmly against the g lass so that no dirt can get und er it and scratch the glass. Winds creen wipe r blade s Wax such as the w ax used in c ar washes can cause smearing on the w indscreen when the windsc reen wiper is switched on. Sm earing w ip er b la des ca n be clea ned w ith a soft cloth and Vaux hall Windscreen Wash Solvent, and replaced if necessa ry – see page 206. Locks The lock s a re lubricated at the fa ctory using a high quality lock c ylinder grease. Use d e-icing agent only where absolutely necessary, as this removes g rease a nd impairs lock function. After using de-icing agent, have the locks regreased by a workshop. Engine compartment Areas of the engine compartment that are painted in the same colour as the vehic le must be looked after lik e any other p ainted surface. It is adv isable to wash the engine compartment before and after winter and preserve it with wax. Cover alternator and brake fluid reserv oir with plastic sheets before washing the eng ine. When w ashing the engine with a steam-jet cleaner, do not direc t the steam jet at components of the Anti-lock Brak e Sy stem (ABS ), air conditioning sy stem, Electronic Climate Control (ECC) or the belt d riv e and its comp onents. When washing down the engine, protective wax a pplied afterwards is also removed. Therefore, a fter washing, hav e the engine, parts of the brake system in the engine compartment, axle components and steering and v ehicle body pa rts and cavities preserved thoroughly by a work shop using protective wax . An engine w ash ca n be p erformed in the spring in order to remov e dirt that has adhered to the engine comp artment, whic h may also have a high salt content. Check protectiv e w ax la yer and ma ke good if necessary. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners in the engine c om partment. Underbody Your vehicle has a factory-app lied PVC undercoating in the wheel arches (including the longitudinal mem bers) which prov ides permanent protec tion and needs no special maintenance. The surfaces of the vehicle underbody not covered by PVC are provided with a durable p rotective wax coating in critic al areas. 197 O n vehicles w hich are washed frequently in automatic c ar washes with underbody washing facility, the protective wax coating may be im paired by dirt-dissolving add itiv es. Therefore, check the underbody a fter washing and have it wax ed if necessary. Before the sta rt of the cold weather season, check the PVC coating and protectiv e wax coating. H ave them restored to perfect condition if necessary. C aution - comm ercially ava ilab le bitum en / rubber materials can damage the PVC coating. We recom mend that y ou ha ve underbody work ca rried out by a workshop. They know the prescribed ma terials and have ex perienc e in the use thereof. The underbody should be washed following the end of the cold weather season to remov e any dirt adhering to the underbody since this may also contain salt. C heck p rotective wax c oa ting and , if nec essary , have it restored to perfec t condition. 198 Service, Maintenance Service, Maintenance Inspection system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . A note on safety .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Checking and topping up fluids ... ..... . Engine oil . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Coolant .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Brake fluid ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind screen wiper .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Wind screen and headlight wash sy stems 3.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Protection for electronic c om ponents Vehicle decomm issioning. ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle recommissioning.. ..... .... .... ..... . 200 In our ex perience, the most com mon cause of all complaints is the result of misunderstanding or lack of communication betw een the customer a nd the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer. We sincerely hope y ou will never have cause to complain ab out y our vehicle. However, if things do go wrong, the best course of action for y ou to ta ke is to contact your Vaux hall Authorised Repairer’s Serv ice Reception S taff and exp la in the difficulty you are having. We are confident they will d o their utmost to resolv e the problem to your complete satisfaction. 201 201 202 202 203 204 205 206 Sometim es, howev er, despite the best of intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If y our prob lem has not been resolved to y our satisfaction, please make an appointment to discuss the matter with the M ana ger of the department c oncerned. 207 207 208 209 209 Should you wish to pursue the matter further, the Principal of the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer should be made aware of your concern. It is ad visab le in cases such as this to write to him to confirm your problem and the solutions that have been offered. The majority of areas of concern can be quic kly resolved in this way. You can be assured the Authorised Repairer’s Principal w ill only be too anxious to fully inv estigate y our prob lems and correct any errors mad e. After all, he has a large investment in his business a nd is proud of his reputation and professionalism and fully realises that satisfied customers are his key to success. In the unlikely event that you are still not happy with the answer your Vaux hall Authorised Repa irer has given, or the action he proposes to c orrect the problem , y ou m ay contact the Custom er C are Department 1 ) where a team of C ustomer C are C onsultants will spare no effort to ensure y our complete satisfaction. Vauxhall Motor s Ltd. C ustomer Care, Griffin House, O sborne Road, LUTON , Beds. , LU1 3Y T Telephone: 0845 090 2044 They w ill review all the facts involved. Then if it is felt some further action can be tak en, the Vauxhall Authorised Repairer will b e adv ised accordingly. In any case, y our contact will b e ac knowledged confirm ing Vauxhall Motors’ position in the m atter. If y ou are not satisfied with the outcome, y ou ca n if you wish, seek advice from an independent third p arty suc h as: Autom obile Association (A. A. ) Fanum House, BASI NGSTO KE, Hants., R G21 2EA 1) Ca lls may b e mon itored a nd record ed for training purpo ses. Servic e, Mainten ance Royal Autom obile Club (R.A.C. ), R.A.C . Motoring Services Ltd., 89-91 Pall Mall, LON DO N, SW1Y S 45 The C ustomer Rela tions Depa rtm ent, Soci ety of Motor Manufacturers and Traders Ltd. (S .M.M. T. ), Forbes House, Ha lk in Street, LON DO N, SW1X 7DS Customer C omplaints Serv ice, Scot tish Motor Trad e A ssocia tion, (S.M .T.A.), 3 Palmerston Place, EDI NBURGH, EH12 5AQ General Motors Belgium N.V. Noorderlaan 401 – Haven 500 2030 Antw erp – Belgium Telep hone 00 32-34 50 63 29 General Motors Southeast Europe, org. slož ka Olbrachtova 9 140 00 Prague – C zech Republ ic Tel. 00 420-2 39 004 321 General Motors Hellas S. A. 56 Kifisia s Av enue & Delfon str. Amarousion 151 25 Athens – Greece Tel 00 30-1-6 80 65 01 General Motors Denm ark Jaegersborg Alle 4 2920 C harlottenlund – Denm ark Telep hone 00 45-39 97 85 00 General Motors India S ix th Floor, Tower A, Global Business Park Mehra uli – Gurgaon Road Gurga on – 122 022, Har yana – India Tel. 00 91-124 280 3333 In Luxemb ourg please contact the General M otors Service Department in Antwerp – Belg ium Telephone 00 32-34 50 63 29 Vauxhall M otors Ltd . Customer Ca re Griffin House, O sborne Road Luton, Bedfor dshi re, LU1 3YT – Engla nd Tel. 00 44-845 090 2044 General Motors Finland Oy Pa juniityntie 5 00320 Helsinki – Finl and Tel. 00 358-9 817 101 47 General Motors Franc e 1 – 9, avenue du M arais Angle Q ua i de Bezons 95101 Argenteuil C edex – France Tel. 00 33-1-34 26 30 51 General Motors Austria GmbH Groß-Enzersdorfer S tr. 59 1220 Vi enna – Austria Tel. 00 43 1-2 88 77 444 or 00 43-1-2 88 77 0 ADAM OPEL Gm bH Bahnhofsp la tz 1 65423 Rüsselsheim – Germ any Tel. 00 49-61 42-77 50 00 or 00 49-61 42-7 70 The N ationa l Conciliation Service, Retail Motor Ind ust ry Fed era tion, 9 North Street, RUGBY , CV21 2AB If you have a p roblem w hilst abroa d: The S ervice Departments of ADAM O PEL GmbH and General Motors branches everyw here will provide information and assistance: 199 General Motors Southeast Europe Ltd. S zabadsag utca 117 2040 Budaörs – H ung ary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 General Motors Ireland Ltd. O pel House, Unit 60, Heather Road Sa ndyford , Dublin 18 – Ireland Tel. 00 353-1-216 10 00 General Motors Italia Srl Piazza le dell’Industria 40 00144 Rome – It aly Tel. 00 39-06-5 46 51 General Motors Ned erland B. V. Lage Mosten 49 – 63 4822 NK Breda – N et herla nds Tel. 00 31-76-5 44 83 00 General Motors Norge AS K jeller-Vest 6 2027 Kj el ler – Norw ay Tel. 00 47-23 50 01 04 General Motors Poland Sp. z o. o. Domaniewsk a 41 06- 672 Wa rsa w – Pola nd Tel. 00 48- 22-606 17 00 200 Service, Maintenance General Motors Portugal Q uinta d a Fonte Ed ificío Fernão M agalhães, Piso 2 2780-190 Pa ço d’Arc os – Portugal Tel. 00 351- 21 440 75 00 Inspection system General Motors S outheast Europe, org. z ložk a Apollo Business Centre Mlynské Nivy 45 821 09 Bra tislav a – S lovak ia Tel. 00 421-2 58 275 543 This remaining distance can be displa yed with the ignition off: briefly press the trip odometer reset button, the m ileage / kilometre reading app ears. Press the button again for around 2 seconds, InSP and the rem aining d istance is shown. General Motors España S. L. Paseo de la C astellana, 91 28046 M adrid – Spa in Tel. 00 34-902 25 00 25 General Motors N orden AB Årstaä ngv ägen 17 100 73 S tockhol m – S weden Tel. 00 46-20 333 000 General Motors S uisse S .A. Stelzenstraße 4 8152 Glatt brugg – Swit zerland Tel. 00 41-44 828 28 80 General Motors Türkiy e Ltd. S ti. Kemalpa sa y olu üz eri 35861 Torb ali/Izmir – Tur key Tel. 00 90-2 32-8 53-14 53 In Alb ania, Bosnia-H erzegovina , Bulga ria, C roatia, Estonia, La tvia , Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania , Serbia -Monteneg ro and Sl ov enia please contact the General Motors S ervice Department in Budaörs – Hungary Tel. 00 36-23 446 100 For vehicles with flexib le engine oil change and serv ice intervals, the length of these interva ls is based on several parameters stemm ing from usage. For this reason, va rious engine-specific data is continually gathered a nd is used to calculate the remaining distance until the nex t Service. In order to ensure economical and safe vehicle operation and to m ainta in the value of y our v ehicle, it is of vital importanc e that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals as specified. In the case of vehicles with fixed engine oil cha ng e and service intervals, InSP appears in the odometer display if the ignition is switched on when serv ic ing is ov erdue: ha ve the nex t Serv ice c arried out by a work shop within one w eek or 300 miles (500 km). The service interval display takes account of off-the-road p eriods during which the battery is d isconnected. If the rema ining d istance is less than 1000 miles (1500 km ), InSP is displayed with a remaining distance of 600 miles (1000 km) when the ignition is sw itched on and off. I nSP is disp layed for severa l seconds if the remaining distance is less than 600 m iles (1000 k m). Have the Service work that is due carried out within one week or 300 miles (500 k m). Have this work carried out by a Va ux hall Authorised Repairer in order to avoid inva lid ation of warranty claims. Further information on maintenance and the Service Plan c an be found in the Serv ice Booklet, which is in the glove com partment. Servic e, Mainten ance Hav e m aintenanc e work and repa ir work on the vehicle body and engine carried out by a repairer in accordance with Vauxhall Motors’ recommendations, using Genuine Vauxhall Parts a nd Accessories. We recommend consulting your Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, who has ex cellent knowled ge of Vauxhall vehicles and possesses the necessary special tools and the c urrent Serv ic e Instruc tions from Vauxhall. To avoid a loss of warranty claims, y ou are a dvised to consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer during the warranty p eriod in particular. For further inform ation, see the Service Book let. Separate anti-corrosion s ervice Hav e this work done in accordance with the interv als specified in the Service Booklet. Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories 201 A note on safety We rec om mend that you use "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" a nd conv ersion p arts ap prov ed exp ressly for your vehicle type. These parts ha ve undergone spec ia l tests to establish their reliability, safety a nd specific suitability for Vauxhall v ehicles. Despite continuous market monitoring, we ca nnot assess or guarantee these attributes for other prod uc ts, even if they hav e b een granted approval by the releva nt authorities or in some other form. "Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Accessories" and conversion parts approved by Vauxhall c an be ob tained from y our Vauxhall Authorised Repairer, w ho c an prov ide com prehensive advice about permitted tec hnical c hanges and ensure that the part is installed correc tly . To av oid injury from moving parts and cab les conduc ting ignition voltage, only carry out engine c om partment checks (e.g. checking brake fluid or engine oil level) when the ignition is switched off. 9 Warn ing The cooling fan is controlled by a thermosw itc h and can therefore start unexpectedly ev en if the ig nition is switched off. Risk of injury . Electronic ignition sy stems use a very high voltage. Do not touch the ig nition sy stem; danger to life. 202 Service, Maintenance Engine oil le vel and consumption Every engine consum es engine oil for technical rea sons. The engine oil consumption cannot be assessed until a fa irly long dista nce has been driven, and may be above the spec ified v alue when the vehicle is first being driven (run-in period). Frequent driving at high revs increases engine oil c onsumption. Engine oil level che ck, topping up engine oil The engine oil lev el is check ed autom atic ally1) – see page 85. Before emba rk ing on a long journey it is advisable to check the engine oil lev el. Never carry out any repairs or adjustm ent and m aintenance work on the vehic le yourself. This especia lly applies to the engine, chassis and safety pa rts. You may , out of ignorance, infringe the provisions of the la w and, b y not performing the work properly , you m ay endanger y ourself and other road users. 9 Warning Imp ortant: It is the owner’ s responsibility to maintain the correct level of a n appropriate quality oil in the engine. Checking and topping up fluids The cap s for topping up the engine oil, the coolant, the wa sh fluid and the oil d ipstick are yellow for ease of identifica tion. Engine oil Information on engine oils is available in the S ervice Booklet. 1) N ot for Z 20 LEH engine. Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ge 212. The illustrations show checking of a petrol eng ine and a diesel engine. Servic e, Mainten ance 203 We recommend that you use g enuine eng ine oil filters. The oil level must be c hecked with the vehic le on a level surface and with the engine (which must b e at operating tem perature) switched off. Wait at lea st 5 minutes before check ing the level to allow the norma l engine oil accumulation in the engine to flow into the oil p an. 9 Warn ing Emp ty engine oil conta iners are not domestic refuse. Observ e legal requirem ents regarding protection of your health and the environment w hen disposing of used oil a nd engine oil filters. Diesel fuel filter Top up with the same brand of engine oil that was used during the previous oil cha ng e, following the instruc tions in the Serv ic e Booklet. To close, position the cap and screw it into place. To check the engine oil level, insert wiped oil dipstick into dipstick tube as far as it will go. Top engine oil up if the lev el has dropped into the range of the top -up m ark MIN . The engine oil level must not exceed the upper mark M AX on the dipstick. Excess engine oil must be drained off or extracted. If the engine oil level is above the MAX mark, there is a risk of damag e to the engine or the ca ta lytic converter. Ca pacity between MI N and MA X marks – see pages 224, 225. Capacities – see pages 224, 225. 9 Warning Do not allow the eng ine oil to drop below the minim um lev el! Engine oil change , engine oil filter change Have engine oil and filter changed by a work shop in ac corda nce with the service intervals ind icated. When changing the engine oil, have the diesel fuel filter checked by a workshop for any residual water. Illumination of control indicator A indicates w ater in the diesel fuel filter 3. Hav e d iesel fuel filter check ed a t shorter interva ls if the vehicle is subjected to extrem e opera ting conditions such a s high humidity (prima rily in coasta l areas), extrem ely hig h or low outside temperatures and substantially varying daytime and night-time temperatures. 204 Service, Maintenance Coolant The g ly col-based c oolant provides excellent corrosion protection for the heating a nd cooling systems as well as anti-freez e protection d ow n to approx. -28 °C. It rem ains in the cooling system throughout the y ear and need not be changed . Use of certain anti-freezes can lea d to engine damage. We therefore recommend that you use only approved anti-freezes. The frost protection m ust ensure antifreeze protection down to approx. -28 °C . Too low a concentration of anti-freeze will reduce frost protection and corrosion protection. If required, top up anti-freeze. If coolant loss is top ped up with water, ha ve c oncentra tion checked and add anti-freeze if necessary. Coolant level 9 Warning The coolant should be a little a bove the KALT / C OLD mark in the expansion tank with a cold cooling sy stem. The coolant level c an also be rea d off from the outside of the exp ansion tank. 9 Warn ing Allow engine to cool down before removing c oolant filler cap. Remove filler cap carefully so that pressure can escape slowly, otherwise there is a risk of sca ld ing. When the engine is at op erating temperature, coolant lev el rises. It falls aga in when the system cools. If it falls below the KALT / COLD mark when the system is cold, top up to the mark. Anti-freeze is a danger to health; it must therefore be k ept in the original container and out of the rea ch of children. Anti-freeze and corrosion prote ction Top up a nti-freeze. If no anti-freeze is av ailable, top up with clean tap water. If tap water is unavailab le, distilled water can b e used. Hardly a ny losses occur since the cooling sy stem is sealed and it is thus rarely necessary to top up the coolant. When you top up with tap water or distilled water, add concentrated anti-freeze and possibly mix in a nti-freeze as well. Have the reason for the loss of coolant rectified by a workshop. Too low a coolant level can cause engine dam age. To close, position the cap and screw it into place. Hav e y our coolant replaced at the correct concentration by a workshop at the start of the w inter. Servic e, Mainten ance Coolant te mperature Control indicator W illuminates when coolant temp erature is too high. C heck coolant lev el imm ediately: z Coolant level too low: Top up coolant: see the instructions under "Anti-freeze and corrosion protection" and "C oolant level". H ave the reason for the loss of c oolant rectified b y a work shop. Brake fluid Brake fluid lev el 9 Warning Brake fluid is poisonous a nd corrosive. Do not allow it to contact eyes, sk in, fabrics or painted surfaces. Direct conta ct may cause injuries and dam age. 205 There are brake fluids which could lead to dam age or reduced braking w hen used. Therefore, we recommend that you use, where necessary , only ap prov ed high performa nc e brak e fluid. When topping up, ensure max imum cleanliness as contamination of the brak e fluid can lead to function prob lems in the brak ing sy stem. O nce the brake fluid level has been correc ted, hav e the reason for the loss of brak e fluid rectified by a workshop. z Coolant level correct: Have the reason for the high c oolant temperature rectified. S eek the assistance of a workshop. Brake fluid change Brake fluid is hygrosc op ic , i.e. it ab sorbs water. If the brakes become hot, such as when driving on long downhill stretches, va pour b ub bles can occur in the water, which can hav e an extremely adverse effect on braking power (dep ending on the proportion of water). The fluid c hange interva ls specified in the S ervice Booklet m ust therefore be observed. The fluid lev el in the container must be neither higher than the MAX mark nor low er than the M IN m ark. 9 Warn ing Have your brake fluid changed at a workshop. Observ e legal requirements – regarding p rotection of your health and the environm ent – when disposing of used oil and engine oil filters. 206 Service, Maintenance Windscreen wiper Service se tting for front windscre en wiper Clear vision is essential for safe driving. Perform regular checks on the windscreen wiper and hea dlight wash system 3 to ensure they are operating correctly. We recom mend wiper bla de replacement at lea st once a y ear. If the windscreen is dirty, operate the windscreen wash system before sw itc hing on the windscreen wiper or setting the wiper to automa tic op eration with the rain sensor 3. This w ill a void wiper blade wear. Do not switc h on the windscreen wiper or set it to a utomatic operation with the rain sensor 3 if the w indscreen is ic ed up, a s this could dam age the wiper blades or the wiper sy stem. We recommend that you release a froz en windscreen wiper using de-ic er spray before sta rting the vehic le, to p revent wiper motor damag e. Sm earing w ip er b la des ca n be clea ned w ith a soft cloth and Vaux hall Windscreen Wash Solvent. Wiper b la des whose lips have become hardened, cracked or c ov ered with silicone must be replaced. This may be necessary as a result of the effects of ice, tha wing salt or heat, or the incorrect use of cleaning agents. Switch off the wind screen wiper or automatic wiper with rain sensor 3 in car w ashes – see pages 11, 12, 195. Wind screen wiper care – see pag e 197. To ensure proper op eration of the rain sensor 3, the sensor a rea must be free from dust, dirt and ice, which is why the wind screen wash system must be operated at regular interv als and the sensor area de-iced. Vehicles with a rain sensor 3 can be id entified by the sensor area near the top of the windscreen. (e.g. for changing or cleaning the front wiper blades). Within 4 seconds of turning off the ig nition, with the key still in the starter switch or for the Open&S tart sy stem 3 after switching off the ignition and before opening the driver’s door, press the wiper stalk d own. Release wiper stalk a s soon as the wiper is vertical. Servic e, Mainten ance Wiper blades on the windscreen Lift wiper arm. Diseng age wiper b la de a s shown in Fig . 17318 T and rem ove. Windscreen and headlight wash systems 3 Activating service position, see previous column. Lift wiper arm, push both bars on wiper arm, relea se wiper blade and rem ov e. Wiper blade on the rear window 207 The wind screen wash system and hea dlight wash system will not freeze in winter: Frost protection down to Mix ture strength Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent: Water - 5 °C - 10 °C 1: 3 1: 2 - 20 °C - 30 °C 1: 1 2: 1 When closing the container, press the lid firmly ov er the bea ded edge all the way round. Battery The fluid reservoir filler neck for the wind screen wash system and headlight wash system 3 is located at the front next to the left headlight. Capacities – see pages 224, 225. Fill only with clean water to prev ent the nozz les from clogging. To im prov e cleaning efficienc y, w e recommend tha t you ad d a little Vauxhall Windscreen Wash Solvent. The battery is m aintenance-free. 208 Service, Maintenance 9 Warning Have your battery changed at a work shop. O bserve legal req uirements – regarding protection of y our health and the environment – when disposing of old batteries. The b attery m ay b e plac ed under additional load or d ischarged by retro-fitting electric or electronic accessories. S eek adv ice on technical options, e.g. having a stronger ba ttery fitted. Laying up the vehicle for more than 4 weeks can lead to ba ttery d ischarge, which may reduce the service life of the battery. Disconnect battery from on-board power supply by detaching negative term inal. The Vaux hall alarm sy stem 3 siren m ust b e deactivated as follows: switch the ignition on then off, disconnect the vehicle’s battery within 15 sec onds. Ensure that ignition is switched off before connecting battery . Then perform the following actions: z Setting date and tim e in the inform ation display – see pages 90, 93, 97. z Activate window 3 if necessary – see page 48. In order to prevent the battery from discharging, some consumers such as the courtesy light autom atically switch off after approx . 10 minutes. Disconnecting / connecting the batte ry from / to the electrical system Before c harging, disc onnec t the battery from the electrical system: rem ov e the negative cable first, then the positive. The battery poles, i. e. the connections for the positive and neg ativ e ca bles, must not be c onfused. When connecting, connect the positiv e ca ble first, then the negative. Protection for electronic components In order to prevent faults in electronic components in the electrica l sy stem, nev er connect or disconnect battery with engine running or ignition switched on. Never start engine w ith b attery disconnected, e.g. when starting using jump leads. To av oid damaging the vehic le, d o not ma ke a ny modifications to the electrical system, e. g. connecting ad ditional consum ers or tampering with electronic control units (chip tuning). 9 Warn ing Electronic ignition sy stems use a very high voltage. Do not touch the ig nition sy stem; danger to life. Servic e, Mainten ance Vehicle decommissioning O bserve na tional regulations. If the vehicle is to be laid up for several months, the following work should b e undertaken by a workshop in ord er to prevent dam age. z Wash and preserve the vehicle – see pa ge 195. z Check preserv ation in engine com partment a nd on underbody a nd rectify where necessary . Vehicle storage z Park v ehicle in a dry, well ventilated place. With manual transmission or Easy tronic 3 , enga ge 1st or rev erse gear. With automatic transm ission 3, selector lever in P. Use chocks or the lik e to prevent the vehicle from rolling . z Do not apply handbrake. z Disconnect battery by disengaging neg ativ e terminal from vehicle electrical system – see page 207. 209 Vehicle recommissioning O bserve national regulations. Perform the following work before recommissioning the vehicle: z Connect ba ttery – see page 207. z Check tyre pressure and correc t if necessary – see page 220. z Fill up w indscreen wash system a nd headlight wash system – see page 207. z Check engine oil level – see p age 202. z Clean and preserv e rubber seals on bonnet and doors. z Check the coolant level; top up with anti-freeze if necessary – see page 204. z Change engine oil – see page 203. z Fit the num ber p la te if necessary . z Check anti-freeze and c orrosion protection – see page 204. z Check the coola nt level, top up with antifreeze if nec essary – see pag e 204. z Empty windsc reen w ash system and headlight wash system. z Inc rease ty re pressure to value sp ecified for full load – see page 220. 210 Tec hnic al D ata Technical Data Vehicle docum ents, identification plate..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle identification d ata.... .... .... ..... . Coolant, b ra ke fluid, oils .. ..... .... .... ..... . Engine data. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Performance.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Fuel consump tion, CO 2 emissions ..... . Weights, pay loa d and roof load .. ..... . Tyres ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Electrical system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Ca pacities ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Insta lla tion dim ensions of trailer tow ing equipment. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Permissible options for fitting a child restra int . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . Vehicle documents, identification plate 210 211 211 212 214 215 217 220 223 224 226 227 228 Information on identification plate: The tec hnical d ata is determined in accordance with European C ommunity standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. S pecifications in the vehic le docum ents alwa ys have priority ov er those given in this manual. The identification plate is affix ed to the front right door frame. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Manufa cturer Type approval numb er Vehicle I dentification Number Permissib le Gross Vehicle Weight Permissib le Gross Train Weig ht Maxim um perm issible front axle load Maxim um perm issible rear ax le load Vehicle-specific or country-specific data Technical Data Vehicle identification data 211 Coolant, brake fluid, oils Use approved fluids only. Use of unsuitable fluids could ca use serious dam age to the vehicle. Engine oils Information on engine oils is availab le in the Serv ice Booklet. The Vehicle Identification Numb er is stamped on the identification plate a nd on the right side of the vehicle floor, under a cover between the front door and the seat. The Vehicle I dentification N umber may b e embossed on the instrument pa nel. Engine code and engine number: stamp ed on left-ha nd side of engine on crankcase. 212 Tec hnic al D ata Engine data Sales designation Eng ine identifier code 1.6 Z 16 XEP 1.6 Z 16 XE1 1.8 Z 18 XER 2.0 Turbo Z 20 LER 2.0 Turbo Z 20 LEH 2.2 Z 22 YH Numb er of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4 4 Piston displacement (cm 3) 1598 1598 1796 1998 1998 2198 Brake horse power (k W) at rpm 77 6000 77 6000 103 6300 147 5400 177 5600 110 5600 Torque (Nm ) at rpm 150 3900 150 3900 175 3800 262 4200 320 2400-5000 215 4000 Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol Petrol 95 3) 98 3 ) 91 3 )4) 95 3 )5) 98 3 ) 91 3 )6 ) 95 3) 98 3) –7) Fuel type 1) O ctane requirement unleaded or unleaded or unleaded (RO N) 2 ) 95 98 91 3) 3) 3)4 ) 95 98 91 3) 3) 3 )4) 95 98 91 3) 3) 3)4 ) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous (rpm) ap prox . 6500 6500 6400 6400 6400 6500 O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 0.6 Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , unlead ed DIN EN 2 28. Stan da rd high-q uality fuels . Va lue printed in bo ld : recom mend ed fuel. Kn ock contro l s ys tem a utoma tically a d jus ts ig nition tim ing a ccording to typ e o f fuel used (octa ne nu mber). Use of 91 RON fuel reduces p ower an d torq ue. Use of 95 RON fuel reduces p ower an d torq ue. Slig ht in crease in fuel con sump tio n. If no u nlea d ed p remium fuel is ava ila ble, 91 RON ca n b e used, taking ca re to a vo id high en gine loa d or fu ll load a s well a s d rivin g in mo untainou s terra in with a caravan / trailer loa d o r hig h pa ylo ad . The use o f fuel w ith a n octane of 91 R ON is not permitted . Technical Data Engine data Sales designation Eng ine identifier code 1.9 CDTI Z 19 DT 1. 9 CDTI Z 19 DTH Numb er of cylinders 4 4 Piston displacement (cm 3) 1910 1910 Brake horse power (k W) at rpm 88 3500 110 4000 Torque (Nm ) at rpm 280 2000-2750 320 2000-2750 Diesel Diesel 49 (D) 3 ) 49 (D) 3) Max . permissible engine speed, continuous (rpm) ap prox . 5200 5200 O il consumption (l/1000 km) 0.6 0. 6 Fuel type 1) Cetane requirement 1) 2) 3) (CN) 2 ) Stan da rd high-q uality fuels , diesel DIN EN 590 Stan da rd high-q uality fuels : D = D ies el A lo wer va lue is pos sib le with w inter diesel fu els. 213 214 Tec hnic al D ata Performance (approx. mph/k m/h) Eng ine 1 ) Z 16 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 22 YH Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 110/177 – – 110/177 – – 122/197 122/197 – 140/225 – – 144/231 – – 124/200 – 118/190 Eng ine 1 ) Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Max imum speed2) Manual tra nsmission Easytronic Automatic transmission 116/186 – 113/182 126/202 – 123/198 1) 2) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 212, 213. The ma xim um s peed ind ica ted is achieva ble a t kerb weig ht (with out driver) p lu s 200 kg p ayloa d. Optiona l eq uipm ent cou ld red uce th e s pecified maximu m sp eed of th e vehicle. Technical Data Fuel consumption, CO2 emissions Directive 80/1268/EEC (last c hanged by 1999/100/EC) has applied for the measurement of fuel consumption since 1996. The d irective is oriented to a ctual driving practices: Urban driving is ra ted at ap prox . 1 / and extra-urb an driving with approx. 3 2 / (urba n and ex tra -urba n consumption). 3 Cold starts and acc eleration phases are also taken into consideration. The specific ation of C O2 emission is a lso a constituent of the directive. The figures given must not be taken as a guarantee for the actual fuel consum ption of a particular vehic le. All va lues are based on the EU ba se model with standard equipment. The calculation of fuel consump tion as specified b y directive 1999/100/EC tak es account of the vehicle’s kerbweight, ascertained in a ccord ance w ith these regulations. Optional ex tras may result in slightly higher fuel consumption and C O 2 emission levels than those quoted. 215 To convert l/100 k m into mpg, divide 282 by num ber of litres/100 km. S aving fuel, p rotecting the environm ent – see page 143. 216 Tec hnic al D ata Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 k m), CO 2 emission (approx. g/k m) (up to tyre width 195 mm ) Eng ine 1 ) Z 16 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 22 YH Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2 9. 3/–/– 5. 8/–/– 7. 1/–/– 170/–/– 9. 3/–/– 5. 8/–/– 7. 1/–/– 170/–/– 10.1/ 9.9/– 6.2/ 6. 0/– 7.6/ 7. 4/– 182/ 178/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– – /–/– – /–/– – /–/– – /–/– Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– –/–/– – /–/– – /–/– – /–/– – /–/– Z 20 LEH Z 22 YH 13. 4/–/– 7.4/–/– 9.6/–/– 230/–/– 11.3/–/11.6 6. 4/–/ 6.7 8. 2/–/ 8.5 197/–/204 Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2 Fuel consumption (approx. l/100 k m), CO 2 emission (approx. g/k m) (up to tyre width 225 mm ) Eng ine 1 ) Z 16 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 18 XER Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2 9. 5/–/– 6. 0/–/– 7. 3/–/– 175/–/– 9. 5/–/– 6. 0/–/– 7. 3/–/– 175/–/– 10.3/10.1/– 13.3/– /– 6.4/ 6.2/– 7.3/– /– 7.8/ 7.6/– 9.5/– /– 187/ 182/ – 228/–/– Manual transm ission/Ea sytronic/Automatic transm ission Urb an Extra-urban Total CO 2 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 212, 213. Z 20 LER 7.5/– /9.7 7.6/–/ 9. 7 5.0/– /5.6 5.1/–/ 5. 6 5.9/– /7.1 6.0/–/ 7. 1 159/– /192 160/–/192 Technical Data Weights, payload and roof load The p ayload is the difference between the p ermitted Gross Vehicle Weight (see identification plate, page 210) and the EC kerbweig ht. To ca lc ulate the kerbweight, enter the data for your vehicle below: z Kerb weight from Ta ble 1, p age 218 z Ad ditional w eight of op tional extras from Ta ble 2, p age 219 z Weight of heavy accessories from Ta ble 3, p age 219 Total is the EC k erbweight. +... ..... .... .. kg +... ..... .... .. kg +... ..... .... .. kg =... ..... .... .. kg O ptional equipment and accessories increase the kerbweight, w hich means that the p ayload will also change slig htly. Note the weights given in the vehicle documents. The combined total of front a nd rear ax le loa ds must not exceed the perm issible Gross Vehicle Weight. For exam ple, if the front ax le is bearing its m aximum permissib le load, the rear axle can only bear a load that is eq ua l to the Gross Vehicle Weight m inus the front axle load. When the carav an / trailer is coup led a nd the towing vehic le fully loaded (including all occupants), the perm issible rear ax le loa d (see identification plate or v ehicle docum ents) may be exceeded by 90 kg and the Gross Vehicle Weight rating by 75 kg. If the permissib le rear axle load is exc eeded, a max imum speed of 60 mph (100 k m/h). ap plies. If nationa l regulations specify a low er ma ximum speed for vehicles towing a caravan / trailer, this must b e observ ed. For perm itted axle load s, see identification plate a nd vehicle documents 217 Roof load The permissible roof loa d is 75 kg. The roof load consists of the weight of the roof rac k plus the load carried. Driving hints – see page 141. Roof racks, c aravan and trailer towing – see page 164. 218 Tec hnic al D ata Table 1, Kerbweight in kg1 ) Model Eng ine 2 ) Manual transmission Ea sytronic Automa tic transmi ssion Zafira Z 16 XEP 1505 – – Z 16 XE1 1505 – – Z 18 XER 1503 1503 – Z 22 YH 1570 – 1595 Z 19 DT 1613 – 1643 Z 19 DTH 1613 – 1643 Zafira with a ir Z 16 XEP condit ioning system or Elect roni c Z 16 XE1 Cl imate C ontrol Z 18 XER (EC C) Z 20 LER 1520 – – 1520 – – 1518 1518 – 1610 – – 1665 – – Z 22 YH 1585 – 1610 Z 19 DT 1628 – 1658 Z 19 DTH 1628 – 1658 Z 20 LEH 1) 2) According to EC D irective, inclu ding ass umed weights for d river (68 kg), lugg ag e (7 kg ) a nd a ll flu id s (ta nk 9 0 % fu ll). Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 212, 213. Technical Data Table 2, Additional weight of optional extras in kg Eng ine 1 ) Z 16 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Ex pression / Life 10 10 102 ) _ – Design _ _ 23 16 – SRi _ _ 20 13 – Club 12 12 12 _ – – – 3) Eng ine 1 ) Z 22 YH Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Ex pression / Life 5 2) 52 ) _ Design 16 16 16 SRi 13 13 13 Club 5 5 _ VXR – – – VXR – – Table 3, Heavy accessories in kg Accessories Towi ng eq uipment Adap tive Forward Lighting (AFL) H ea dlight w ash syst em Panoram ic roof Weight 17 4 3 35 1) 2) 3) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 212, 213. Life only. Va lues no t a va ila ble at tim e of p rinting. 219 220 Tec hnic al D ata Tyres Restrictions Tyres of size 225/45 R 17 may only be used in conjunction with the Electronic S ta bility Programme (ES P) 3. Not a ll tyres ava ila ble on the market currently meet the structural requirem ents. We recommend that you consult a Vauxhall Authorised Repairer concerning suitab le tyre mak es. These ty res have und ergone special tests to establish their reliab ility , safety and specific suitability for Vaux hall vehicles. Despite continuous m arket monitoring, we are unable to assess these attributes for other tyres, ev en if they hav e been g ra nted approva l by the relevant authorities or in som e other form. Further information – see pa ge 159. Wheels Wheel bolt tightening torque: 110 Nm. Winter tyres 3 Tyres of size 225/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19 are not permitted for use as winter ty res. If y ou use winter tyres, the spare wheel 3 may still be fitted with a summer tyre. I f you use the spare wheel the vehicle’s ha nd ling may be altered. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre a s soon as possible, and have the wheel b alanc ed a nd fitted to the vehic le. Winter tyres may only be used on the Za fira VXR on special alloy wheels approved by Vauxhall. Further inform ation – see page 159. Tyre chains 3 Ty re c hains may be used on the front wheels only. We rec om mend the use of fine ty re chains whic h rest by a max imum of 10 mm on the tyre tread and on the insides of the tyres with a chain lock. Ty re c hains are not permitted on tyres of size 225/40 R 18 and 235/35 R 19. Further inform ation – see page 159. Spare wheel 3 Depend ing on the version, the spare w heel may ta ke the form of a temporary spare wheel 3: v ehicle driveab ility may be altered by use of the spare w heel. O btain a replacement for the faulty tyre as soon as possible, and have the w heel balanced and fitted to the vehicle. Observ e the notes on this page and on pa ges 164, 176. Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) The specified ty re pressures are valid for cold ty res. The increased ty re pressure resulting from ex tensiv e d riv ing must not be reduced. The tyre pressures specified on the following pages ap ply to both summer and w inter tyres. Alway s inflate the spare wheel 3 to the tyre pressure for full load, see tables on following pages. Temporary spare wheel tyre pressure 3, see tables on next pag es. In v ehicles with Tyre Pressure Monitoring S ystem 3 there is a n adapter in the valv e cap key . S crew a dapter to valve before attaching tyre pressure gauge – see page 160. Further information – see pages 159 to 163. On vehicles with alloy w heels 3: the spare wheel may hav e a steel rim . The spare wheel may be fitted with a sma ller tyre and smaller wheel tha n the wheels fitted to the vehicle. 1) 1 ba r corresp on ds to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. Technical Data Continued: Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) Tyre pressure with full load Tyres Front Rear Front Rea r Front Rear Z 16 XEP, Z 16 XE1, Z 18 XER 195/65 R 15, 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 2.0/29 2.0/29 2.5/36 2.5/36 2. 1/30 2. 6/38 225/40 R 18 2.2/32 2.2/32 – – 2. 3/33 2. 8/41 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 2.2/32 2.0/29 2.6/38 2.6/38 2. 4/35 2. 9/42 225/40 R 18 2.4/35 2.2/32 – – 2. 5/36 3. 0/44 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2. 6/38 3. 1/45 225/40 R 18 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2. 8/41 3. 2/46 Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel) 3 ) 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4. 2/61 4. 2/61 Z 20 LER All 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. Tyre pressure EC O 1 ) loaded up to 3 people Engine2 Z 22 Y H 1) Tyre pressure with load of up to 3 people 221 1) To achieve the sm allest a mou nt o f fuel con sump tio n po ssible. No t for u se with run -fla t tyres . 2) Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 212, 21 3. 3) For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 176. 222 Tec hnic al D ata Continued: Tyre pressure in bar / psi 1) Engine2 ) Front Rear Front Rea r Front Rear 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2. 7/39 3. 2/46 Z 19 DT, Z 19 DTH 195/60 R16 2.6/38 2.4/35 – – 2. 8/41 3. 2/46 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 2.4/35 2.2/32 – – 2. 6/38 3. 1/45 225/40 R 18 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2. 7/39 3. 1/45 205/55 R 16, 225/45 R 17 2.5/36 2.3/33 – – 2. 6/38 3. 1/45 Spare wheel (temporary spare wheel) 6 ) 4.2/61 4.2/61 – – 4. 2/61 4. 2/61 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) DTH5 ) R R 173 )4) , R 18, R 19 Tyre pressure with full load 205/50 225/45 225/40 235/35 All 1 ba r corresp ond s to 100 kPa / 14.5 p si. 173 ), Tyre pressure EC O 1 ) loaded up to 3 peop le Z 20 LEH Z 19 1) Tyres Tyre pressure with load of up to 3 people To achieve the sm allest a mou nt o f fuel con sump tio n po ssible. No t for u se with run -fla t tyres . Sales d esigna tion – s ee p a ges 212, 21 3. Only permitted a s winter tyres. To g ua ra ntee a correct sp eed d is play, the electro nic sp eedom eter mus t b e rep ro gram med. Versio n with au tom atic tra nsm iss io n an d p ano ra mic roof. For notes on the temp orary spa re w heel – see p ag e 176. Technical Data Electrical system Battery Voltage 12 Volt Amp hours 44 Ah / 55 Ah 3 / 60 Ah 3 / 66 Ah 3 / 70 Ah 3 Battery for remote c ontrol of central locking sy stem and electronic key of O pen&Start CR 20 32 sy stem 223 224 Tec hnic al D ata Capacities (approx. litres) Eng ine 1 ) Z 16 XEP Z 16 XE1 Z 18 XER Z 20 LER Z 20 LEH Z 22 YH Fuel tank (nominal content) 56 56 56 56 56 56 Engine oil with filter change between MI N and M AX on dipstick 4.5 1.0 4.5 1.0 4.5 1.0 4.25 1.0 5. 0 1. 0 5. 0 1. 0 Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wa sh system with headlight wash system 2.3 4.2 2.3 4.2 2.3 4.2 2.3 4.2 2. 3 4. 2 2. 3 4. 2 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 212, 213. Technical Data 225 Capacities (approx. litres) Eng ine 1 ) Z 19 DT Z 19 DTH Fuel tank (nominal content) 56 56 Engine oil with filter change between MI N and M AX on dipstick 4. 3 0. 7 4. 3 0. 7 Wash fluid reservoir for windscreen wa sh system with headlight wash system 2. 3 4. 2 2. 3 4. 2 1) Sa les desig nation – see pa ges 212, 213. 226 Tec hnic al D ata Dimensions (approx. mm) Zafi ra Zafira VXR O verall length 4467 4503 O verall w id th 1801 1801 Width with two ex terior mirrors 2025 2025 O verall height 1635 1635 Height with panora mic roof 1670 1670 Lug gage compartment length at floor 1088 1088 Lug gage compartment width 1071 1071 Height of luggage compartment opening 895 895 Wheelb ase 2703 2703 11.50 11.85 Turning c ircle diam eter, wall to 1) In metres. wall1 ) Technical Data Installation dimensions of trailer towing equipment All dimensions refer to fac tory -fitted towing equipm ent. 9 Warning Only use towing eq uipm ent approved for your vehicle. We recommend entrusting retrofitting of towing equipment to a work shop. Dimension mm A 76.4 B 425.4 C 448.7 D 404.0 E 510.5 F 466.0 G 188.5 H 168.0 I 466.0 K 510.5 227 228 Tec hnic al D ata Permissible options for fitting a child restraint1) Weight and age cl ass2 ) O n front passeng er’ s seat On outboa rd sea ts in t he second row O n centre sea t in the sec ond row O n the seat s i n the t hi rd row Group 0: up to 10 kg or approx. 10 months B1 , + U, + U X B2 , + U, +, ++ U UF X U U UF Group 0+: up to 13 kg or approx. 2 years Group I : 9 to18 k g or approx. 8 months to 4 y ears Group I I: 15 t o 25 kg or approx. 3 to 7 years Group I II: 22 t o 36 kg or approx. 6 to 12 y ears 1) 2) For reas ons o f sa fety, w e recom mend tha t the child restraint be installed o n one o f the outbo ard sea ts in the secon d row o f sea ts. We reco mmen d the use of each system u ntil the child reaches the up per weight lim it. Technical Data B 1 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vaux hall child restra int system with transponders. If the child restraint sy stem is being secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 to uppermost position. Move front passeng er’s seat as far bac k as possible and move front pa ssenger’s seat belt anchorage point to lowest position. B 2 = Limited, only with seat occupancy recognition and Vaux hall child restra int system with transponders. If the child restraint sy stem is being secured using a three-point seat belt, move seat height adjustment 3 to uppermost position. Move front passeng er’s seat as far back as possible so that vehicle safety b elt runs from anchorage point towards the front. U = Univ ersal suitability in conjunction with three-point seat belt. UF = Can be used universally for child restra int systems facing the front in combination with a three-p oint seat belt. + = Vehicle seat av ailable with ISO -FIX attachments. When attaching using ISO -FIX, only the IS O-FIX child restraint systems permitted for the v ehicle m ay b e used. ++ = Vehicle seat av ailable with ISO -FIX attachments. When attaching using ISO -FIX a nd Top Tether, universally permitted ISO -FIX child restraint systems may be used. X = N o c hild restraint system permitted in this weight cla ss. 229 230 In dex Index A AB S (Anti-lock Brake System ).. ..... .... ..... 159 Ac cessories. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 174 Ac cessory socket ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 78 Ad just incline Seat . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 50 AFL (Adaptive Forward Lighting) .... ..... 108 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 191 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Air conditioning system ... .... .... ..... . 114, 119 Air intak e.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 130 Air qua lity sensor ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 125 Air recirculation system .... .... ..120, 123, 129 Air vents . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 115 Airba g system . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .23, 69 Airba gs... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 69 Ala rm .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 44 Ala rm system .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 42 Alterna tor ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 84 Antenna . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 112, 195 Anti-freeze . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 204 Anti-freeze protection. ..... .... .... ..... . 204, 207 Anti-knock q ua lity of fuel .... .... ..... .... ..... 144 O ctane number.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 212 Anti-theft alarm sy stem ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 42 Anti-theft locking system . .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 38 Towing equip ment .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 166 Anti-theft protection ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 18 Aq ua planing ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 162 Arm rest... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 52 Ashtray ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 79, 110 Automatic air recircula tion m od e. 126, 128 Automatic anti-dazz le interior mirror.. ... 46 Automatic level control... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 153 Automatic transm ission.. .... ..... .. 14, 15, 136 Automatic mode .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 137 Control indica tor. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Driv ing programme ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Fault .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 140 Interruption of p ow er supply ... ..... .... . 141 Kickd ow n.... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 139 Manual mode . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Selector lev er... .... .... ..... ... 14, 15, 137, 138 Winter programme. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 139 Automatic wiping ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 12, 103 Index B C Battery ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... 142, 207, 223 Interrup tion of power supply .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 48, 135, 141 Battery discharge p rotection.... .... ..... .... 110 Before sta rting-off ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 16 Belt force limiters . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..64 Belt tensioners. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 64 Bleeding, d iesel fuel system.. .... .... ..... .... 170 Board Information Disp la y ... .... .... ..... .... .. 89 Bonnet ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 170 Brake assist . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Brake light ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Brake system ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 84 Brakes ABS .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 159 Bra ke assist . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Bra ke fluid ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 205 Bra ke lig hts.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 191 Bra ke servo unit ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 141 Footbrake .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 157 Handbrake .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 158 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 187 Bulbs ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 187 Capacities .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 224 Car Pass . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Carava n / trailer towing ... .... .... ..... . 141, 167 Care .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 194 Catalytic conv erter .. .... ..... .... ..146, 148, 171 Central lock ing sy stem ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 37 Changing the b attery Remote c ontrol .... .... ..... .... .... .. 33, 37, 223 Changing tyre / wheel type . .... ..... .... ..... 159 Changing wheels ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 176 Chassis num ber, see vehicle identification num ber .. ..... 211 Check control .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 25, 101 Child restraint sy stems ..... .... .... ..... ... 68, 228 Child safety lock s..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 45, 47 Cigarette lighter . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 78, 110 Climate control ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 114 Clutch operation. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 CO 2 emissions . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 215 Cold start ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 Colour Information Display . .... ..... .... ..... .. 89 Continuous Damping C ontrol.. ..... ... 85, 150 Contra st.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 98 231 C ontrol indicators... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 8, 82, 83 ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sy stem).. ..... .... . 159 AFL (Adaptive Forwa rd Lighting)87, 108 Airb ag .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 73 Belt tensioners .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 64 Brake sy stem... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 158 Cruise control .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 151 DDS (Deflation Detection System ) ... . 154 Engine elec tronics... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 147 ESP (Electronic Stab ility Prog ra m).... . 148 Exhaust... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 147 IDS+ (Interactive Driving Sy stem) .... .. 150, 151 Immobiliser. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 31 Parking dista nce sensors ..... .... ..... .... . 153 Tra nsmission ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 138 Tyre pressure monitoring system . .... . 156 C oolant . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 C oolant level .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 C oolant tempera ture . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 84 C ooled glove compartm ent .... .... ..... .... . 117 C ooling .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 120, 124 C orrecting time... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 92, 97 C orrosion protection .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 196, 201 C oupling socket load . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 167 C ourtesy lights .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 109 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 193 C ruise control. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 151 C urtain airbag s .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 72 C urv e lighting (AFL) ... ..... .... ..... .... .... 29, 108 232 In dex D E F Data .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 30, 210 Date .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 90, 93 Daytime running lig hts . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 105 DDS (Deflation Detection Sy stem) .. 28, 154 Dec om missioning .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 208 Dem isting and defrosting ..... .... .... ..... .... 119 With air conditioning sy stem .... .120, 124 With Electronic Climate C ontrol ..... .... 127 Diesel fuel filter .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203 Diesel fuel system .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .170, 203 Diesel particle filter.. ..... .... ..... ... 86, 116, 142 Dimensions.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .225, 226 Dipped beam .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 10 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 188 Display ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 88, 89 Display instruments. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 87 Display mode .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 98 Door handle lighting .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 110 Door locks.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 30, 196 Doors .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 84 Door-to-door lighting. .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 108 Drink holders ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 81 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .144, 199 Driving hints .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 141 Easytronic ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 14, 131 Driving programm es .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 133 Fault.... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 135 Interruption of power supply .... .... ..... 135 K ic kdown ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 134, 135 Selector lever... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 14 Starting-off.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 132 Winter programm e.. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 133 Economical driving .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 143 Elec tric windows . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 46 Elec trica l sy stem . ..... .... ..... .... ..182, 208, 223 Elec tro-hydraulic power-assisted steering . .... .... ..... .... ..... 141 Elec tronic C limate Control ... .... ..... . 115, 124 Elec tronic com ponents ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 208 Elec tronic imm obiliser . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Elec tronic S tability Program .... ..... .... ..... 148 Engine c od e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..211, 212, 213 Engine c ontrol indicator... .... .... ..... .... ..... 147 Engine oil .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 202 Engine oil c hange .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 203 Engine oil level and consump tion ... 85, 202 Engine speed .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 Engine w ash .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Entry lighting... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110 Environmental protection .... .... ..... . 194, 203 ESP (Electronic Stab ility Prog ra m).... ..... 148 Exhaust control indicator . .... .... ..... .... ..... 147 Exhaust gases . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 148 Exhaust sy stem ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 148 Exterior mirrors ... ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 5, 45, 116 Fan .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 117, 201 Filling station Capac ities .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 224, 225 Engine oil level .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 202 Fuel .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 144, 212, 213 Opening the bonnet .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 170 Tyre pressure .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 144, 220 Vehic le da ta .... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 211 Windscreen wash sy stem ..... .... ..... .... . 207 First-aid kit (cushion) . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 174 Flat tyre. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 179 Flex Organizer ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 60 Fog tail light... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 107 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Footb ra ke .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157 Front fog lig hts ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 106 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Front p assenger’s airbag ... ..... .... ..... .... ... 69 Fuel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 145, 212, 213 Fuel consum ption ... .... ..... .... ... 143, 144, 215 Fuel filler c ap . ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 145 Fuel filter .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 203 Fuel level .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 88 Fuel system, diesel . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 170 Fuse ex tractor..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 183 Fuses . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 182 Index 233 G H I Gears .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Generator – see Alternator ... .... .... ..... .... .. 84 Genuine Vauxhall Parts and Ac cessories . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 201 Glasses compartment .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 80 Glove compartment ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 80, 117 Glove compartment lighting . .... .... ..... .... 110 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 194 Graphical Information Displa y . .... ..... .... ..89 Gross Vehicle Weight.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 217 Halogen headlight sy stem .. .... ..... .... ..... 188 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 188 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Handbrake. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 17, 18, 158 Hazard w arning lights ..... .... .... ..... ... 11, 107 Head restraints ... ..... .... ..... .... .... .... 24, 51, 52 Head lig ht flash ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 10, 105 Head lig ht range adjustment ... ..... . 107, 187 Head lig ht switch. ..... .... ..... .... .... 10, 105, 106 Head lig ht w ash system .... .... .... 12, 103, 207 Head lig hts.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 10 Day tim e running lights . .... .... ..... .... ..... 105 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Reversing lights.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 107 Warning dev ice.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 102 Heated exterior mirrors.... .... .... ..... ... 13, 116 Heated rear window ... ..... .... .... ..... ... 13, 116 Heated seats... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116 Heating .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 114, 118 Seats ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 116 With air conditioning system .... . 120, 124 With Electronic C limate Control .... ..... 126 Height ad justment Seat belts..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 66 Steering wheel. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 9 High-pressure jet ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 167, 197 Hill Start Assist .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 158 Horn.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 11 Identifica tion plate. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 210 IDS + (Interactive Driving S ystem) .. 148, 150 Ignition logic .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 93, 98 Ignition system ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 201, 208 Im mobiliser .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 30 Information disp lay .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 89 Infotainment system .. ..... .... ..... .... .. 112, 113 Inspection system ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 88, 200 Instrum ent illumination ... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 109 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 194 Instrum ents .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 82 Interior m irror. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... ... 5, 46 Interruption of power supply ... 48, 100, 102 Easytronic... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 135 Electric windows . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 48 Selector lev er lock ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 141 IS O-FIX .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 68 234 In dex J L M Jac k . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .174, 177 Jump leads .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 171 Language selection . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .93, 97 Lashing ey es ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60 Leather trim .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Light switch ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 10 Lighting .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 10, 85, 105 Driving abroad ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 111 Load compartment – see Luggag e com partment ... ..... .... ..... .. 41 Loading .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 167, 217 Locking d oors . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 2, 37 Locking from the inside ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 39 Locks... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Lubricants .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 202, 211 Luggag e comp artm ent Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 194 FlexO rganizer . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60 Lashing eyes ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 60 Lighting .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110 Loading .. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 62, 167, 217 Locking ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 41 Luggag e comp artm ent cover . ..... .... . 57, 58 Luggag e comp artm ent extension ... ..... .. 54 Lumba r support.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 50 Main b eam . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 10, 105 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 189 Control indica tor. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 86 Maintenance Air cond itioning system .. ..... .... ..... .... . 130 Anti-freeze protection . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 Brake fluid .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 205 Brakes ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157 Cataly tic conv erter . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 148 Engine oil .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 202 Fuel consumption ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 144 Tyre pressure .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 160 Tyres .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 161, 162 Windscreen wiper ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 206 Manual transmission – see Transm ission 14 Mirrors ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 5, 45, 46 Misted wind ow s.. .... .... ..... .... ..... 13, 119, 127 Mobile telephone ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113 Motorway lighting (AFL) . .... ..... .... .... 29, 108 K Keys .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 30 Extending .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 30 Locking d oors... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 37 Remove .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 18 Starter switch ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .... 9 Starting the engine ... .... ..... .... .... . 9, 16, 17 Index 235 N P R Neutra l, transm ission ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Numb er plate lighting .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 193 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 193 Numb er plates ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 209 Pa intwork damage.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 196 Pa noramic roof ... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 48, 195 Pa rk ing distance sensors . .... .... ..... ... 27, 152 Pa rk ing ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 18, 152 Pa rk ing lights .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 10, 109 Bulb replacem ent .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 189 Pa rts ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 201 Pedals . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 142 Perform ance ... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 215 Petrol .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..144, 212, 213 Pinking .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 144 Pollen filter . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 129, 130 Power steering, see electro-hyd ra ulic power-assisted steering . .... .... ..... .... ..... 141 Preheating.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 17, 86 Puddle light ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 110 Pushing, towing .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 171 Rad io . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 112 Rad io equipment (CB) .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 113 Rad io reception .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 112 Rain sensor .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 12, 103, 206 Reading lights..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 110 Rear light cluster .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 105 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Rear seat b ackrests.... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 20 Rear window w ash system ..... .... .... ..... .12, 104, 195, 207 Rear window wiper. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 104 Refuelling ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 145 Fuel filler cap .. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 146 Remote control Central lock ing sy stem .... ..... 2, 26, 32, 34 Luggag e com partment .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..3 Steering wheel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... 26, 112 Replacement keys .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 30 Reversing lights Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Roof load ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .63, 142, 144, 217 Roof racks .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 144, 164, 217 Run-flat tyres (RFT) .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 163 Running-in.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 141 Brakes ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 157 O O ctane numbers.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .144, 212 O dometer .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 87 O il chang e... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 203 O il level and consum ption .... .... .... ..... .... 202 O ils .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 202 O pen&Start system .. ..... .... ..... .17, 26, 33, 83 O perating temperature.... ..... .... .... ..... .... 142 O utside temperature ga uge . .... .... ..... .... ..90 O verrun.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .142, 143 Q Quickhea t... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..118, 123, 126 236 In dex S Safeguard against unauthorised use . 9, 19 Safety net .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 58 Sav ing energ y . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 143 Seat adjustment .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 3, 49 Seat belts. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .63, 65, 196 Seat height a djustment .... ..... .... .... ..... .. 4, 49 Seat occupancy recognition . .... .... ..... .... ..74 Seat position ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 50 Seats ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... . 3, 49, 50 Heated . .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 116 Seats in second row. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 20 Seats in third row . .... ..... .... ..... .... ...20, 53, 55 Selector lever ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .132, 137 Selector lever lock .... ..... .... ..... .... .14, 15, 137 Self-diagnosis.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .64, 74, 159 Self-help... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 170 Automatic transmission .... .... .... ..... .... 140 Elec tric wind ow s... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 48 Information display .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 90 Remote control . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... 32, 37 Serv ic e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 198 Serv ic e interv al display .... .... .... ..... .... ..... 200 Serv ic e work .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 200 Side airbags .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 71 Silencer, see Ex ha ust system ... ..... .... ..... 148 Spare fuses. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 182 Spare keys.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Spare wheel .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 175, 176 Speed.. .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143, 144 Fuel consum ption .... ..... .... .... ..... . 143, 144 Speedometer .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 87 Sport mode ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .. 27, 85, 150 Starter switch .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... 9 Starting the engine.. .... ..... .... 9, 31, 131, 171 Self-help.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 171 Steam jet .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... . 167, 197 Steering colum n lock ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 9, 18 Steering wheel adjustm ent .. .... ..... .... ..... .... 9 Steering wheel rem ote control ..... ... 26, 112 Stop watch . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 94 Stowage compartments .. .... .... .... 79, 80, 81 Sunv isors .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... ... 81, 110 Sunb lind . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 48 System setting s... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 92, 96 T Tables.... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 79 Tachometer ... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 87 Tail lights.... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 105 Bulb replacement ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 191 Tailgate. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 41 Technical data ... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 210 Telephone – see Mobile telephone.. .... . 113 Temperature regulation . .... ..... .... ..117, 126 Temporary spare wheel.. .... ... 164, 176, 220 The first 600 miles (1000 k m) .. .... ..... .... . 141 Tightening torque .. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 178, 220 Time... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 90, 93 Tools.. .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 174 Top-Tether . .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 69 Towing .. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 172 Towing equipment . .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 164, 227 Towing eye .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 172, 173 Trailer / ca ra van towing . .... ..... .... ..141, 167 Transm ission displa y.. ..... .... ..... 88, 131, 136 Index Transm ission, autom atic.. ..... .... .14, 15, 136 Automatic mode.. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 137 Driv ing programme .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 138 Fault ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 140 Interrup tion of power sup ply .... ..... .... 141 Kickdown . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139 Selector lever .... .... ..... .... ..... ... 14, 137, 138 Selector lever lock ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Winter prog ra mme ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 139 Transm ission, Easytronic.. ..... .... .... ..... .... 131 Driv ing programmes. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 133 Fault ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 135 Interrup tion of power sup ply .... ..... .... 135 Kickdown . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .134, 135 Selector lever .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 14, 132 Winter prog ra mme ... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 133 Transm ission, manual .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 14 Tread dep th .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 162 Trip computer . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... ... 25, 93, 98 Trip odometer . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... .. 87 Triple Information Display .... .... .... ..... .... .. 89 TSA (Trailer Stability Assist).. .... .... ..... .... 168 Turn signals. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 10, 106 Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... .190, 191 Twin Audio .. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ... 26, 112 Tyre chains.. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... .163, 220 Tyre condition . ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 161 Tyre pressure... ..... .... ..... ... 28, 155, 160, 220 Tyre pressure monitoring system . ... 28, 155 Tyre repair kit.. ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 179 Tyres, wheels... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 159 237 U W Units of measure ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... . 93, 98 Unleaded fuel . .... ..... .... ..... .... ..144, 146, 212 Used oil... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 203 Warning buzzers .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 102 Warning messages. .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... . 91, 95 Warning triang le, ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 174 Wash fluid reservoir, w indscreen wash system .. ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Weights . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 217 Wheels, tyres.. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 159 Windows Demisting and defrosting .... . 13, 119, 120, 124, 127 Windscreen w ash system .... ..... .... .... 12, 103 Anti-freeze protection . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Capac ities .. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 224, 225 Wa sh fluid reserv oir ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Windscreen w ip er ... .... ..... .... ..... 11, 102, 205 Winter mode Starting-off a id ... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 133 Winter operation Battery .... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 142 Coolant, anti-freez e .... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 204 Fuel consumption ... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 144 Fuel for diesel engines .... ..... .... ..... .... . 145 Heating .. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ... 114, 120, 124 Locks . ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... ..... .... . 196 Tyre cha ins. ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 164, 220 Window demisting and defrosting... . 119 Windscreen wash sy stem, anti-freeze protection . .... ..... .... ..... .... . 207 Winter programm e. .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 133, 139 Winter tyres.... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .. 163, 220 V Valve cap key . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .161, 220 Vehicle care .... .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 194 Vehicle decommissioning .... .... ..... .... ..... 208 Vehicle dimensions.. .... ..... .... .... ..... .... ..... 226 Vehicle Identifica tion N um ber. ..... .... ..... 211 Vehicle keys – see K ey s.... .... .... ..... .... ..... .. 30 Vehicle recommissioning . .... .... ..... .... ..... 209 Ventilation.. ..... .... ..... .... .. 114, 118, 123, 127 238 In dex X Xenon headlight system Bulb replacement. ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 191 Driv ing abroad . .... ..... .... ..... .... .... ..... .... 111 Owner’s Manual ZAFIRA Operation, Safety and Maintenance Reproduction or translation, in whole or in parts, is not permitted without prior written consent from Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All rights as understood under the copyright laws are explicitly reserved by Vauxhall Motors Ltd. All information, illustrations and specifications contained in this manual are based on the latest production information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice. Edition: January 2007. TS 1639-B-07 ZAFIRA ©Copyright by Vauxhall Motors Ltd., England.